You are on page 1of 322

LEARNING

CONFIGURATION WORKBOOK

SUCCESSFACTORS VERSION Q4 2019 (1911)

<COMPANY NAME>

1
Revision History

Number Date Author(s) Description


1.0 07/27/2018 Initial Draft

Approvals
Department /
Printed Name Signature Date
Company

2
Table of Contents
Suggested Order of Implementation Activities...........................................................................14
1911 New Features/Major & Minor Updates..............................................................................15
1. Introduction and Business Analysis....................................................................................16
1.1 Company Background..................................................................................................16
1.2 About This Document...................................................................................................16
1.2.1 Attachments to this Document...............................................................................16
1.2.2 Future Revisions to this Document........................................................................16
1.3 Current State................................................................................................................ 16
1.4 Gap Analysis................................................................................................................. 17
2. Security – Domains, Domain Restrictions and Roles..........................................................17
2.1 Domains....................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.1 Domain Types and Usage.....................................................................................18
2.2 Domain Restrictions......................................................................................................21
3. Role Management.............................................................................................................. 23
3.1 Admin Roles............................................................................................................. 24
3.2 User Roles.................................................................................................................... 26
3.3 Delegate User Role (Proxy User)..................................................................................31
3.4 Instructor Role.............................................................................................................. 34
4. User Management.............................................................................................................. 36
4.1 User Attributes.............................................................................................................. 36
4.1.1 User ID.................................................................................................................. 36
4.1.2 User Status........................................................................................................... 36
4.1.3 Role (User Role)...................................................................................................37
4.1.4 Comments............................................................................................................. 37
4.1.5 Primary Supervisor................................................................................................37
4.1.6 Alternate Supervisor..............................................................................................38
4.1.7 HR Business Partner.............................................................................................38
4.1.8 Gender.................................................................................................................. 38
4.1.9 Job Title................................................................................................................ 39
4.1.10 Job Code............................................................................................................. 39

3
4.1.11 Job Code Custom Columns (Custom Fields)......................................................39
4.1.12 Job Families........................................................................................................40
4.1.13 Job Positions.......................................................................................................40
4.1.14 Job Location........................................................................................................40
4.1.15 Is Full-Time......................................................................................................... 41
4.1.16 Regular / Temp...................................................................................................41
4.1.17 Employee Type...................................................................................................41
4.1.18 Employee Status.................................................................................................42
4.1.19 Region................................................................................................................. 42
4.1.20 Resume............................................................................................................... 43
4.1.21 Hire Date............................................................................................................. 43
4.1.22 Termination Date.................................................................................................43
4.1.23 Related Instructor................................................................................................44
4.1.24 Address, City, Postal Code.................................................................................44
4.1.25 Country............................................................................................................... 44
4.1.26 Email address.....................................................................................................44
4.1.27 Phone Number....................................................................................................45
4.1.28 Alternate Job Codes............................................................................................45
4.1.29 User Custom Columns (Custom Fields)..............................................................45
4.2 Organizations................................................................................................................ 46
4.2.1 Organization Group...............................................................................................47
4.2.2 Organization Type.................................................................................................47
4.2.3 Organization Custom Columns (Custom Fields)....................................................48
4.2.4 Organization Based Headers and Footers............................................................48
4.2.5 Configurable “From” email address by Organization.............................................49
4.3 Groups.......................................................................................................................... 50
4.3.1 Group Impact areas/functionality...............................................................................50
4.3.2 Other Impact Areas....................................................................................................50
4.3.3 Related Workflows.....................................................................................................51
4.4 Class............................................................................................................................. 51
4.4.1 Class Status.......................................................................................................... 52

4
4.4.2 Class Custom Columns (Custom Fields)...............................................................52
4.5 Assignment Profiles......................................................................................................52
4.5.1 Assignment Profile Attributes................................................................................53
4.5.2 Assignment Profile Operators................................................................................56
5. Learning Management....................................................................................................... 58
5.1 Catalogs....................................................................................................................... 58
5.1.1 Catalog Browse (1611)..........................................................................................59
5.1.2 Catalog 3.0 (1705)................................................................................................61
5.1.3 Topic Banner Configuration...................................................................................65
5.1.4 Catalog –User Generated Content........................................................................65
5.2 Items............................................................................................................................. 66
5.2.1 Item Classification.................................................................................................66
5.2.2 Item Type.............................................................................................................. 67
5.2.3 Item ID.................................................................................................................. 68
5.2.4 Completion Status.................................................................................................69
5.2.5 Item Revision Date and Time................................................................................70
5.2.6 Revision Number...................................................................................................71
5.2.7 Item Status............................................................................................................ 71
5.2.8 Item Thumbnail Photos.........................................................................................71
5.2.9 HTML Item Descriptions........................................................................................72
5.2.10 Item Cover Page.................................................................................................73
5.2.11 Sources (formerly Item Source)...........................................................................73
5.2.12 Delivery Method (Method ID)...............................................................................74
5.2.13 Assignment Type................................................................................................74
5.2.14 Approval Process................................................................................................75
5.2.15 Hours.................................................................................................................. 77
5.2.16 E-Signatures.......................................................................................................77
5.2.17 Notifications.........................................................................................................78
5.2.18 Subject Areas......................................................................................................79
5.2.19 Period-Based Item Assignment (Initial Assignment)............................................79
5.2.20 Item Substitute Relationships..............................................................................83
5
5.2.21 Item Prerequisite Relationships...........................................................................83
5.2.22 Minimum Registration..........................................................................................84
5.2.23 User Item Ratings...............................................................................................84
5.2.24 Item Re-launch (Online Items).............................................................................84
5.2.25 Item Custom Columns (Custom Fields)...............................................................84
5.3 Scheduling.................................................................................................................... 85
5.3.1 Schedule Offering ID.............................................................................................86
5.3.2 Schedule Offering Status......................................................................................86
5.3.3 Schedule Offering Time Zone and Show in this Time Zone Setting.......................86
5.3.4 Approval Process ID/Approval Required...............................................................86
5.3.5 Withdraw Approval Process ID/Withdraw Approval Required................................87
5.3.6 Registration/Withdraw Cut-Off Date......................................................................87
5.3.7 Minimum and Maximum Registrations...................................................................87
5.3.8 Registration Statuses............................................................................................87
5.3.9 Self-Registration....................................................................................................88
5.3.10 Notifications.........................................................................................................88
5.3.11 Slots.................................................................................................................... 89
5.3.12 Contacts (Others)................................................................................................90
5.3.13 Cancelling a Schedule Offering...........................................................................90
5.3.14 Closing a Scheduled Offering..............................................................................90
5.3.15 Scheduled Offering Registration Form................................................................90
5.3.16 Documents.......................................................................................................... 90
5.3.17 Registration Form Custom Columns (Custom Fields).........................................91
5.3.18 Scheduled Offering Custom Columns (Custom Fields).......................................91
5.3.19 Schedule Blocks..................................................................................................92
5.3.20 Cancellation Reasons.........................................................................................92
5.4 Instructor....................................................................................................................... 92
5.4.1 Instructor View......................................................................................................93
5.4.2 Instructor Custom Columns (Custom Fields).........................................................94
5.5 Task Checklist.............................................................................................................. 95

6
5.5.1 Tasks.................................................................................................................... 95
5.5.2 OJT Usage............................................................................................................ 95
5.5.3 Authorized Observers............................................................................................96
5.5.4 Observer – Self Assigned......................................................................................96
5.5.5 Observer – Admin Assigned (b1608)....................................................................96
5.6 Jam and Jam Groups (Integration in conjunction with BizX Platform)...........................98
5.7 Evaluations (1708)........................................................................................................99
5.7.1 Rating Scales for Questionnaire Surveys............................................................101
5.8 Accomplishments (1705)............................................................................................102
5.8.1 Select the subject areas they want to track..............................................................103
5.8.2 Select the number of courses they want to track......................................................103
5.8.3 Total Learning per month.........................................................................................104
5.8.4 Time spent by topic..................................................................................................104
5.9 Curricula..................................................................................................................... 105
5.9.1 Curriculum Status................................................................................................105
5.9.2 HTML Curriculum Descriptions............................................................................108
5.9.3 Curriculum Cover Page.......................................................................................109
5.9.4 Curriculum Type..................................................................................................110
5.9.5 Curriculum Force Incomplete..............................................................................111
5.9.6 Curriculum Substitute Force Incomplete (b1602)................................................111
5.9.7 Item Sequence / Display Order...........................................................................112
5.9.8 Curriculum Custom Columns (Custom Fields).....................................................112
5.10 Requirements........................................................................................................... 113
5.11 Recommended Items................................................................................................114
5.12 Peer Recommendations...........................................................................................114
5.13 Collections (b1608)...................................................................................................115
5.14 Programs.................................................................................................................. 116
5.14.1 Program Custom Columns (Custom Fields)......................................................118
5.15 QuickGuides............................................................................................................. 119
5.16 External Links (GA b1602)........................................................................................120
5.17 Open Content Network.............................................................................................121
5.17.1 Open Content Network Partners.......................................................................122
5.17.2 OCN Configuration File.....................................................................................122
5.17.3 OCN Framework for adding new OCN Providers..............................................122
5.18 Course Home............................................................................................................ 127
7
5.19 Personalized Learning Recommendation (b1808 – Early Adopter Care)..................130
6. Physical Resources.......................................................................................................... 131
6.1 Facility........................................................................................................................ 132
6.1.1 Ad Hoc Facilities.................................................................................................133
6.2 Location...................................................................................................................... 134
6.2.1 Location Type......................................................................................................134
6.2.2 Locations............................................................................................................. 135
6.3 Work Week Profile......................................................................................................135
6.4 Holidays...................................................................................................................... 136
6.5 Holiday Profile............................................................................................................. 136
6.6 Calendars and Time (1611)........................................................................................137
6.7 Materials..................................................................................................................... 138
6.8 Equipment.................................................................................................................. 138
6.8.1 Equipment Type..................................................................................................138
6.8.2 Equipment Status................................................................................................139
6.8.3 Equipment........................................................................................................... 140
6.9 Regions...................................................................................................................... 140
6.10 Custom Resources...................................................................................................140
7. Online Content Management............................................................................................141
7.1 Managing Online Content...........................................................................................141
7.2 Considerations............................................................................................................ 142
7.2.1 Mastery Score.....................................................................................................143
7.3 Content Import Tool....................................................................................................144
7.4 Deployment Locations................................................................................................144
7.5 Content Types............................................................................................................ 145
7.6 Content Objects and Packages...................................................................................146
7.6.1 Inline Content Launch.........................................................................................146
7.6.2 Enabling Content for Mobile Access....................................................................147
7.6.3 Enabling Content for Offline Access....................................................................147
7.6.4 AICC Document Wrapper....................................................................................147
7.7 Documents................................................................................................................. 148
7.7.1 Document Types.................................................................................................148
7.8 Objectives................................................................................................................... 149
7.8.1 Objective Custom Columns (Custom Fields).......................................................149
7.9 Question Library Builder.............................................................................................150
7.9.1 Related Workflows...................................................................................................150
7.10 Questions (PQE Legacy Functionality).....................................................................150
8
7.10.1 Question Custom Columns (Custom Fields).....................................................150
7.11 Question Builder.......................................................................................................150
Supported Question Types:..........................................................................................151
Related Workflows.......................................................................................................151
Admin Workflows:........................................................................................................ 151
Add/Edit/Remove Images.............................................................................................151
7.12 Assessments............................................................................................................ 152
Related Workflows.......................................................................................................154
Admin Workflows:........................................................................................................ 154
7.13 Exam Objects (Legacy Functionality)........................................................................154
7.13.1 Exam Custom Columns (Custom Fields)...........................................................155
7.14 Quiz Builder.............................................................................................................. 155
8. Data Privacy and Protection.............................................................................................156
9. System Configuration.......................................................................................................157
9.1 Configuration - Global Variables.................................................................................157
9.1.1 General Settings.................................................................................................157
9.1.2 Mail Settings........................................................................................................162
9.1.3 Electronic Signature Settings..............................................................................166
9.1.4 Esig Meaning Code.............................................................................................167
9.1.5 AICC Wrapper Settings.......................................................................................168
9.1.6 Approval Process Settings..................................................................................168
9.1.7 Password Settings...............................................................................................169
9.1.8 Login Lockout Settings........................................................................................170
9.1.9 Delegate Settings................................................................................................170
9.1.10 Virtual Learning System Synchronization Frequency........................................171
9.2 (Basic) Configuration..................................................................................................171
9.2.1 Certificate Templates..........................................................................................171
9.2.2 Connector Settings..............................................................................................172
9.2.3 Consent Statements............................................................................................172
9.2.4 Content Players...................................................................................................173
9.2.5 Easy Links........................................................................................................... 174
9.2.6 External Reports.................................................................................................175
9
9.2.7 Gamification Settings..........................................................................................175
9.2.8 Landing Page Settings........................................................................................177
9.2.9 Fiori User Interface..............................................................................................180
9.2.10 Images.............................................................................................................. 181
9.2.11 Module Tab.......................................................................................................182
9.2.12 OAuth Token Server..........................................................................................183
9.2.13 Registration Settings.........................................................................................183
9.2.14 User Password Settings....................................................................................185
9.2.15 User Settings.....................................................................................................186
9.2.16 User Security Question Settings........................................................................187
9.2.17 Users Learning Event Recording Defaults.........................................................187
9.2.18 Learning Plan Notification Settings....................................................................188
9.2.19 Coupon Display Settings...................................................................................189
9.2.20 User Login/New Account Panels.......................................................................189
9.2.21 External User in Platform..................................................................................190
9.2.22 User-Created Account.......................................................................................191
9.2.23 VLS Configuration.............................................................................................194
9.3 Auto Generate IDs......................................................................................................195
9.4 Brands – formerly called Branding Styles...................................................................195
9.5 Sites............................................................................................................................ 196
9.6 User Introduction........................................................................................................ 197
9.7 Date/Time Format Patterns.........................................................................................198
9.7.1 Date Patterns......................................................................................................198
9.7.2 Time Patterns......................................................................................................198
10. Tools............................................................................................................................ 199
10.1 Admin Passwords.....................................................................................................199
10.2 Attachments Utilization.............................................................................................199
10.3 Direct Links............................................................................................................... 200
10.4 Label Import/Export...................................................................................................200
10.5 Learning Event Synchronization...............................................................................201
10.6 Import Data............................................................................................................... 201
10.7 Export Data............................................................................................................... 202
10.8 AICC Import.............................................................................................................. 203
10.9 Legacy SCORM Import.............................................................................................203

10
10.10 Download Connector Template (1611)...................................................................204
10.11 Manage Unsent Email.............................................................................................204
11. Automatic Process Settings.........................................................................................205
11.1 Assignment Profile Synchronization..........................................................................205
11.2 Attachment Quota Watch Notification.......................................................................206
11.3 Catalog Price Update................................................................................................206
11.4 Clean up Approval Processes...................................................................................207
11.5 Clean up Background Jobs.......................................................................................208
11.6 Clean up Background Reports..................................................................................208
11.7 Clean up Overdue Item Evaluations.........................................................................208
11.8 Coupon Expiration Notification..................................................................................209
11.9 Curriculum/Program Clean-up..................................................................................209
11.10 Deny Expired Approval Processes..........................................................................210
11.11 Evaluation Synchronization.....................................................................................211
11.12 Employee Enrollment Digest...................................................................................212
11.13 External Verification Reminder................................................................................212
11.14 Jam Groups Notification..........................................................................................213
11.15 Item Request Clean-up...........................................................................................214
11.16 Item Scheduling Demand........................................................................................214
11.17 Learning Expiration.................................................................................................215
11.18 Learning Plan Notification.......................................................................................216
11.19 Native User Deletion...............................................................................................217
11.20 Native User Data Retention....................................................................................218
11.21 Open Content Network Content Synchronization....................................................219
11.22 Power Search Synchronization...............................................................................219
11.23 Power Search Optimization....................................................................................220
11.24 Purchase Order Low Balance Notification...............................................................221
11.25 Purge Deleted User Audit History (1708)................................................................221
11.26 Purge Expired Catalog Items..................................................................................222
11.27 Refresh Org Dashboard Data.................................................................................223
11.28 Reset Online Item...................................................................................................223
11.29 Waitlist to Request List...........................................................................................224
11.30 Scheduled Offering Delivery...................................................................................225
11.31 Subscription Expiration Notification.........................................................................225
11.32 User Requested Scheduled Offering Notification....................................................226
11.33 Recommendations Newsletter................................................................................227
11.34 Program Enrollment/Withdrawal.............................................................................228
11.35 Set Instructor Base Cost.........................................................................................228
11.36 Set Account Request Approval Process.................................................................229
11.37 User-Created Account Reminder............................................................................230
11.38 VLS Attendance Processing...................................................................................230
12. Interface Modification...................................................................................................231
12.1 User Interface........................................................................................................... 231
11
12.2 Locales..................................................................................................................... 231
12.3 Labels....................................................................................................................... 232
13. Advanced System Configuration..................................................................................233
13.1 Notification Templates..............................................................................................233
13.1.1 Template List.....................................................................................................233
13.1.2 Editing Notification Templates...........................................................................242
13.1.2.1 Notification Template Editor.........................................................................243
13.2 Search Selectors......................................................................................................243
13.3 System Configuration Files.......................................................................................244
13.3.1 ATTACHMENT..................................................................................................244
13.3.2 AUTHENTICATION...........................................................................................245
13.3.3 BIZX.................................................................................................................. 249
13.3.4 CATALOG......................................................................................................... 250
13.3.5 CERTIFICATE IMAGE ATTACHMENT.............................................................256
13.3.6 COLLECTION IMAGE ATTACHMENT (Preview release).................................256
13.3.7 CONNECTORS.................................................................................................257
13.3.8 CONSENT STATEMENTS ATTACHMENT.......................................................257
CONSENT STATEMENTS ATTACHMENT.................................................................257
13.3.9 CONTENT IMPORT..........................................................................................257
19.1.1 DIRECT_LINK...................................................................................................258
13.3.10 ENTITY_IMPORT............................................................................................259
13.3.11 FINANCIAL.....................................................................................................259
19.1.2 GAMIFICATION................................................................................................263
19.1.3 ICONTENT........................................................................................................265
19.1.4 IMAGE ATTACHMENT.....................................................................................265
19.1.5 LEARNER_SECURITY.....................................................................................265
13.3.12 LEARNING_ACCOMPLISHMENT..................................................................268
LEARNING_ACCOMPLISHMENT...............................................................................268
13.3.13 LMS_ADMIN...................................................................................................268
13.3.14 MOBILE........................................................................................................... 305
13.3.15 OPEN CONTENT NETWORK.........................................................................307

12
13.3.16 PASSWORD_POLICY....................................................................................308
13.3.17 PERSONALIZED RECOMMENDATIONS (Beta)............................................315
13.3.18 REPORT_SYSTEM.........................................................................................316
13.3.19 SEARCH......................................................................................................... 320
13.3.20 TOPIC BANNER IMAGE ATTACHMENT........................................................325
TOPIC BANNER IMAGE ATTACHMENT....................................................................325
13.3.21 USER GENERATED CONTENT.....................................................................325
13.3.22 USER LEARNING PLAN.................................................................................325
A) Extended Functionality........................................................................................................327
B) Technical Deliverables........................................................................................................328
Extensions Required.........................................................................................................328
Data Migration.................................................................................................................. 328
SSO Interface................................................................................................................... 328
User Interface................................................................................................................... 328
Learning History Interface.................................................................................................328
Custom Report(s)............................................................................................................. 328
Copyright................................................................................................................................. 329

13
Suggested Order of Implementation Activities
The following order is a suggestion, based on best-practices, in which to configure the customer
system. It does not outline every step, and every feature, but serves as a starting point to
establish your own, project-specific sequence.

1) Create Domains and Domain Restrictions


2) Configure Admin Roles, User Roles and Instructor Roles
3) Configure User Attributes
4) Configure Custom Columns (Run Assignment Profile APM to propagate)
5) Create Catalogs manually
6) Set User Default Password
7) Use Entity (Reference) Import spreadsheet to create reference values
8) Instructor import
9) Create Certificate Record (configure certificate design later)
10) Configure User Settings
11) Configure Landing Page Settings
12) Configure Global Variables
13) Configure System Configuration (BIZX, CONNECTORS, ICONTENT, FINANCIAL,
LMS_ADMIN, etc.)
14) Configure Images
15) Configure User-Created Account
16) Configure User Settings
17) Configure Registration Settings
18) Automatic Process Settings
19) Record Configuration

14
1911 New Features/Major & Minor Updates

Copy of Functional
Evolution_6.2_1911.xlsx

15
1. Introduction and Business Analysis
1.1 Company Background
Include any pertinent Company Background information here.

1.2 About This Document


This configuration workbook is a formal deliverable under SuccessFactors Statement of
Work <SOW #>. The information and details contained here are a direct result of a
series of workshops between SuccessFactors consultants and <Customer Name>
project team members. The configuration workbook includes all references necessary
for configuring the SuccessFactors Learning application as identified in the workshops
to support <Customer Name>’s learning management needs within the project’s
identified scope.
1.2.1 Attachments to this Document
Attachments to this document, such as Technical Deliverables listed in Appendix A and any
other appendices and attachments are part of the formal deliverable.

1.2.2 Future Revisions to this Document


This configuration workbook, once it is accepted by <Customer Name>, can be updated by
<Customer Name> as decisions are made over time to change or add to the solutions and
configuration decisions contained in the document. It is the responsibility of <Customer Name>
to maintain this document in those cases. Future releases of the SuccessFactors application
may require changes to the configuration workbook.

1.3 Current State


Document the current state of your organization’s learning management initiatives. This section
should include information about distinct learning Administration groups, learning audiences,
and applications sed. Discuss online training delivery and tracking, as well as instructor led and
virtual training delivery.

Notes

16
1.4 Gap Analysis
Listed below are gaps identified by <Customer Name> between the desired state and
functionality available in SuccessFactors Learning. Solutions are documented where possible,
whether involving creative uses of the application or changes to existing business process.
Customizations are not recommended as they greatly increase the complexity of applying
upgrades, service packs, and patches.

Gap Description Solution Notes

2. Security – Domains, Domain Restrictions and Roles


2.1 Domains
Most entities (Users, items, Curricula, etc.) in SuccessFactors reside in a domain, which
determines record ownership. Used in conjunction with Admin roles and domain restrictions,
domains help control what records administrators may view, edit, copy etc. Domain structure
should primarily be determined by the complexity, delegation and distribution of administrators.
In environments controlled by a small team of Administrators, a complex domain structure may
well be unnecessary.
If Admin permissions are delegated regionally or by line of business for example, a more
complex domain structure will allow for precise control of record ownership. Like directories on
a network, administrators may have permissions to work with records in some but not others.
The hierarchical nature of the domain tree(s) allows for easier distribution of Admin permissions
from parent to child domains. The public domain is always present and may be used by all
administrators (if an Admin role specifies the ‘add item’ workflow, items may be added to the
public domain). The public domain is best used as a ‘share’ in which administrators who cannot
access mutual domains may place copies of records for other administrators to use.
Typical domain structures mirror the organization or regional structure. Depending upon the
unique access requirements of groups of administrators, this model will vary widely. Best
practice is to keep the domain structure small enough for ease of use yet large enough to
accommodate the security needs of the organization. While it is important to put the proper
domain structure(s) in place, domains may be added at any time.

17
System Admin > Security > Domains

Domain ID Level Parent Domain ID Domain Description


Types (100 Char)
(30 Char)
CORP 0 ALL Corporate

HR 1 CORP ALL Human Resources

Notes

2.1.1 Domain Types and Usage


Domains by default may contain any entity (user, item, curriculum, etc.). Some security models
incorporate domain type restrictions, allowing only certain entity types to be added to particular
domains. With this approach, it is possible to create a specific domain structure for Users,
learning entities, etc. as well as controlling what entities Admins can access. The following
table can be used to indicate where the applicable entities may reside given the intended
Domain structure and Admin Roles.
Entity Expected Domain Placement
Account Code
Approval Process
Assessment Process (Legacy Performance)
Assessment Survey (Legacy Performance)

18
Assignment Profile
Brand
Class
Collection
Content Deployment Location
Content Object
Content Package
Coupon
Item
Competency
Catalog
Curriculum
Custom Report
Document
Domain
Domain Restriction
Delivery Type Code (SF-182)
Designation Type Code (SF-182)
Equipment
Event Rule
Exam
External Link
Facility
Community
Goal (Legacy Performance)
Group
Instructor
Job Code
Location

19
Material
Objective
Organization
Performance Review Process (Legacy Performance)
Performance Review Template (Legacy Performance)
Plan (Legacy Performance)
Position (Legacy Performance)
Competency Profile (Legacy Performance)
Question
Question Library
Quiz
Purchase Order
Role
Scheduled Offering
User
Introduction Panel / News Page
Subscription
Questionnaire Surveys
Task
Training Credit Type Code (SF-182)
User Profile / Admin Record

Notes

20
2.2 Domain Restrictions
Domain restrictions are records that determine in which domains administrators may perform
workflows (add item, for example). If an Admin role workflow is unrestricted, any Admin with
that role may perform the workflow to records in all domains. If restricted, the workflow may be
performed only on records in domains included in the domain restriction. Domain restrictions
may contain any combination of domains. In the graphic below, if administrator role workflows
are restricted to Domain Restriction B, C, and D the administrator with that role can only perform
those workflows in the B, C and D domains and the PUBLIC domain. There should be at least
one domain restriction for every unique combination of domains in which a group of
administrators must be able to perform workflows. This typically results in a domain restriction
for every domain, every parent and child relationship and some ‘mix and match’ sets of
domains.

Documented below are the Domain Restrictions <Customer Name> will create:

System Admin > Security > Domain Restrictions

Domain Include
Included Domain Description
Restriction ID Sub-
IDs (100 Char)
(30 Char) Domains

A_C-2 A, C-2 No A and C-2 domains

21
Domain Include
Included Domain Description
Restriction ID Sub-
IDs (100 Char)
(30 Char) Domains

Notes

22
3. Role Management
Roles consist of workflows – the combinations of functions (actions) and entities that grant
system rights. There are over 1100 possible workflows that could be assigned to an Admin role,
many of which are individually available for domain restriction if required. Determining which
workflows Admin roles should have is a challenging process and considerable time and
resources should be invested in building and testing the Admin roles to perform the needed
functions while keeping security and record access in place.

Each workflow may be restricted by domain, but only by one domain restriction record. This
why domain restrictions contain more than one domain and can contain any combination of
domains. In the above example, Admin roles with the ‘edit Scheduled Offering’ workflow can
edit offerings in the C-1, C-2, C-3 and C-4 domains (because those domains are referenced in
that domain restriction record). The Admin role’s ‘view User’ workflow is unrestricted. This
Admin role may view all Users in the system.

23
3.1 Admin Roles
Admin roles consist of selected workflows with (or without) applied domain restrictions.
Remember, domain restrictions are not applied to the Admin role – they are applied to each
individual workflow within the role. Administrator roles are assigned to administrator accounts
which in turn allow individual administrators’ access to SuccessFactors Learning. Admin
accounts may have multiple Admin roles, as workflows do not interfere with each other. The
Admin always has the combination of access provided by all assigned roles.

Several admin roles exist in the system by default. These system default roles are
preconfigured with workflows and are reset with each new release. Because they are reset, it is
recommended to create new admin roles for use rather than using the system default roles so
customers can control the exact permissions for each of their admin roles. The default roles
can be copied if needed.
System Default Admin Roles Description
ALL Default Role with all permissions
ALL_CONNECTOR Role with connectors permissions
ALL_PERFORMANCE Default Role with performance permissions
LEARNING_ADMIN Default Learning Admin Role
This role is provided to Monitoring team for sanity
OPSMONITORING
checking the LMS environment.

24
Listed below are the Admin Roles to be created by <Customer Name> along with notes from
workshop discussions.
System Admin > Security > Role Management

Role ID Description
Permission Details
(30 Char) (100 Char)
SYS_ADMIN System Administrator The default role with full access.
Administrator who manages users,
TRAINING_ADMIN Training Administrator curricula, items, schedule offerings and
resources.
Administrator who manages the
TRAINING_COORD Training Coordinator delivery aspects of training- scheduling,
resources, registrations, etc.
Administrator who trains of a group of
users, accesses schedule offerings,
INSTRUCTOR Instructor
generates reports and who has access
to proctor codes.
Administrator who has access to
REPORTING Reporting Role
reports only.
View and search access to the
VIEW_SEARCH View and Search Role
SuccessFactors LMS.

Please note that integrated clients can add LMS Admin as a link in the dropdown box in
BizX/Platform.
Review the process here: https://blogs.sap.com/2017/07/08/ease-the-navigation-to-learning-
management-system-lms-administration-using-custom-navigation/

Notes

3.2 User Roles


User Roles, like Admin Roles, are used to grant user-side access in the SuccessFactors
application. However, User Role workflows are primarily access to menus and Easy Links – not
to records. There are no Domain Restrictions to apply. Typically, there is only one User Role
applied to all Users in an organization. Sometimes there are needs recognized to grant different
levels of menu access to different groups of Users. In which case, additional User Roles may
be created and assigned automatically via Assignment Profiles to all the Users who match
certain attributes. User Roles may also be assigned manually to individual Users.

25
Note: It is not necessary to create separate User Roles for Supervisors as they are subject to
the User Role assigned to them and the User Assumption Restriction Rules specified in the
LEARNER_SECURITY configuration file.
Two user roles exist in the system by default. These system default roles are preconfigured
with workflows and are reset with each new release. Because they are reset, it is
recommended to create new admin roles for use rather than using the system default roles so
customers can control the exact permissions for each of their user roles.
System Default User Roles Description
DEFAULT USER System Default User Role
LEARNING_USER System Default Learning User Role

Listed below are the User Roles to be created by <Customer Name> along with the workflows
that are to be assigned to each user role.
System Admin > Security > Role Management

User Role ID Description


(30 Char) (100 Char)
<Customer Name>_USER <Customer Name> User Role

<Customer
Menu
Name>_USER
CATALOG
ACCESS ADVANCED CATALOG SEARCH
ACCESS BROWSE CATALOG
ACCESS CALENDAR OF SCHEDULED OFFERINGS
ACCESS SIMPLE CATALOG SEARCH
LEARNING
ACCESS BOOKMARKS TILE
ACCESS CURRICULUM STATUS
ACCESS EXTERNAL LEARNING REQUESTS
ACCESS GAMIFICATION ELEMENTS
ACCESS JAM

26
<Customer
Menu
Name>_USER
ACCESS LEARNING ACCOMPLISHMENTS
ACCESS LEARNING HISTORY
ACCESS PERSONALIZED RECOMMENDATIONS
ACCESS SUCCESSFACTORS LEARNING OFFLINE
ACCESS QUESTIONNAIRE SURVEYS
ACCESS RECOMMENDATIONS TILE
ACCESS RECORD EXTERNAL LEARNING EVENTS
ACCESS RECORD LEARNING EVENTS
ACCESS TRAINING PLANNER
ADD TO LEARNING ASSIGNMENTS
AUTHOR COLLECTION
AUTHOR QUICKGUIDE
EXPORT TRAINING REQUEST DATA
POST GAMIFICATION EVENTS
RECOMMEND TO PEER
WITHDRAW FROM SCHEDULED OFFERING
MY EMPLOYEES
ACCESS LEARNING PLANS
MANAGE ALTERNATE SUPERVISORS
ACCESS REGISTRATIONS
ACCESS SUBORDINATE DEADLINE DASHBOARD
ACCESS RECORD EXTERNAL LEARNING EVENTS
ACCESS RECORD LEARNING EVENTS
ACCESS SUBORDINATES
ORGANIZATION 4 OR 5
ACCESS DASHBOARD - LEGACY. DO NOT USE.
PERSONAL
ACCESS APPROVALS

27
<Customer
Menu
Name>_USER
ACCESS EASY LINK 1
ACCESS EASY LINK 10
ACCESS EASY LINK 2
ACCESS EASY LINK 3
ACCESS EASY LINK 4
ACCESS EASY LINK 5
ACCESS EASY LINK 6
ACCESS EASY LINK 7
ACCESS EASY LINK 8
ACCESS EASY LINK 9
ACCESS HOME
ACCESS COMMUNITIES
ACCESS NEWS
ACCESS ORDER STATUS
ACCESS ORDER TICKETS
ACCESS MY ORDERS
ACCESS PROFILE
ACCESS USER SETTINGS
ACCESS SHOPPING CART
REPORTS
ACCESS REPORTS
RUN EMPLOYEE SUPERVISOR GAP REPORT 5
RUN EMPLOYEES DROP OFF REPORT 5
RUN MY PLAN REPORT 1
RUN ITEM REQUEST REPORT
RUN USER ACTIVE GOALS REPORT 1
RUN USER CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION LEARNING
EVENT REPORT

28
<Customer
Menu
Name>_USER
RUN USER CLOSE FIT JOBS REPORT 1
RUN USER COMPETENCY ASSESSMENT
COMPARISON REPORT
RUN MULTI-RATER PEER VS USER REPORT 3
RUN USER COMPETENCY ASSESSMENT TREND
REPORT
RUN USER CURRICULUM STATUS REPORT
RUN USER DATA PURGE REQUEST REPORT
RUN USER INFORMATION REPORT
RUN USER INITIATIVE ALIGNMENT REPORT 4
RUN USER INITIATIVES REPORT 4
RUN USER ITEM STATUS REPORT
RUN USER LEARNING HISTORY REPORT
RUN USER LEARNING HOURS REPORT
RUN USER LEARNING NEEDS REPORT
RUN USER LEARNING PLAN REPORT
RUN USER MY ALIGNMENT REPORT 4
RUN USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW COMPARISON
REPORT 2
RUN USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW EXCEPTIONS
REPORT 2
RUN USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW HISTORY TREND
REPORT 2
RUN USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW QUESTION
RESPONSE REPORT 2
RUN USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW STATUS REPORT
2

RUN USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW TEAM HISTORY


REPORT 2
RUN USER PROGRAM STATUS REPORT
5
RUN USER SUCCESSION PLAN REPORT

29
<Customer
Menu
Name>_USER
RUN USER TUITION REPORT
AD HOC REPORTS
RUN USER AD HOC CURRICULUM ITEM STATUS
REPORT
RUN USER AD HOC ITEM PROGRESS REPORT
RUN USER AD HOC LEARNING ITEM ASSIGNMENT
AND HISTORY REPORT

RUN USER AD HOC SCHEDULED OFFERING


REGISTRATION REPORT
RUN USER AD HOC REPORT

Note: License Dependencies (Selected workflows are not available without associated product
licenses):
1
Legacy Career and Development License Required
2
Legacy Performance Goals and Appraisals License Required
3
Legacy 360° Multi-Rater Assessments License Required
4
Legacy Goal Alignment License Required
5
Legacy Succession Planner License Required
6
Legacy 360° Multi-Rater Assessments and SuccessFactors Offline Player Licenses Required

Notes

3.3 Delegate User Role (Proxy User)


The delegate user role is assigned to a user who has been selected by a supervisor to act on
their behalf. The supervisor can decide what rights to grant the delegate (Selected
Permissions) or use the globally defined set of rights (Predefined Permissions) which is
controlled by the workflows assigned to the USER PROXY ROLE.

System Admin > Security > Role Management

Menu USER PROXY ROLE


CATALOG

30
Menu USER PROXY ROLE
ACCESS ADVANCED CATALOG SEARCH
ACCESS BROWSE CATALOG
ACCESS CALENDAR OF SCHEDULED OFFERINGS
ACCESS SIMPLE CATALOG SEARCH
LEARNING
ACCESS BOOKMARKS TILE
ACCESS CURRICULUM STATUS
ACCESS EXTERNAL LEARNING REQUESTS
ACCESS GAMIFICATION ELEMENTS
AUTHOR COLLECTION
ACCESS JAM
ACCESS LEARNING HISTORY
ACCESS LEARNING PLAN
ACCESS PERSONALIZED RECOMMENDATIONS
ACCESS QUESTIONNAIRE SURVEYS
ACCESS RECOMMENDATIONS TILE
ACCESS RECORD EXTERNAL LEARNING EVENTS
ACCESS RECORD LEARNING EVENTS
ACCESS TRAINING PLANNER
ADD TO LEARNING ASSIGNMENTS
AUTHOR QUICKGUIDE
EXPORT TRAINING REQUEST DATA
POST GAMIFICATION EVENTS
WITHDRAW FROM SCHEDULED OFFERING
MY EMPLOYEES
ACCESS LEARNING PLANS
MANAGE ALTERNATE SUPERVISORS
ACCESS REGISTRATIONS
ACCESS RECORD EXTERNAL LEARNING EVENTS

31
Menu USER PROXY ROLE
ACCESS RECORD LEARNING EVENTS
ACCESS SUBORDINATES
PERSONAL
ACCESS APPROVALS
ACCESS EASY LINK 1
ACCESS EASY LINK 10
ACCESS EASY LINK 2
ACCESS EASY LINK 3
ACCESS EASY LINK 4
ACCESS EASY LINK 5
ACCESS EASY LINK 6
ACCESS EASY LINK 7
ACCESS EASY LINK 8
ACCESS EASY LINK 9
ACCESS HOME
ACCESS PROFILE
ACCESS USER SETTINGS
REPORTS
ACCESS REPORTS
ACCESS EMPLOYEE SUPERVISOR GAP REPORT 5
ACCESS EMPLOYEES DROP OFF REPORT 5
ACCESS MY PLAN REPORT 1
ACCESS ITEM REQUEST REPORT
ACCESS USER ACTIVE GOALS REPORT 1
ACCESS USER CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
LEARNING EVENT REPORT
ACCESS USER CLOSE FIT JOBS REPORT 1
ACCESS USER COMPETENCY ASSESSMENT
COMPARISON REPORT

32
Menu USER PROXY ROLE
ACCESS MULTI-RATER PEER VS USER REPORT 3
ACCESS USER COMPETENCY ASSESSMENT TREND
REPORT
ACCESS USER CURRICULUM STATUS REPORT
RUN USER DATA PURGE REQUEST REPORT
ACCESS USER INFORMATION REPORT
ACCESS USER INITIATIVE ALIGNMENT REPORT 4
ACCESS USER INITIATIVES REPORT 4
ACCESS USER ITEM STATUS REPORT
ACCESS USER LEARNING HISTORY REPORT
ACCESS USER LEARNING HOURS REPORT
ACCESS USER LEARNING NEEDS REPORT
ACCESS USER LEARNING PLAN REPORT
ACCESS USER MY ALIGNMENT REPORT 4
ACCESS USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW COMPARISON
REPORT 2
ACCESS USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW EXCEPTIONS
REPORT 2
ACCESS USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW HISTORY
TREND REPORT 2
ACCESS USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW QUESTION
RESPONSE REPORT 2
ACCESS USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW STATUS
REPORT 2
ACCESS USER PERFORMANCE REVIEW TEAM
HISTORY REPORT 2
ACCESS USER PROGRAM STATUS REPORT
5
ACCESS USER SUCCESSION PLAN REPORT
ACCESS USER TUITION REPORT
AD HOC REPORTS
RUN USER AD HOC CURRICULUM ITEM STATUS
REPORT

33
Menu USER PROXY ROLE
RUN USER AD HOC ITEM PROGRESS REPORT
RUN USER AD HOC LEARNING ITEM ASSIGNMENT AND
HISTORY REPORT
RUN USER AD HOC SCHEDULED OFFERING
REGISTRATION REPORT
RUN USER AD HOC REPORT

Notes

3.4 Instructor Role


The role type for Instructor enables the Instructor View. There is a DEFAULT INSTRUCTOR
role available in the system and new instructor roles can be created by administrators as
needed. The appropriate workflows should then be added to the role(s) to enable the specific
features. As of 1705 Customers can now add customized reports to the Instructor view similar
to Admin view. Please be mindful that this is not an admin role.

System Default Instructor Role Description


DEFAULT INSTRUCTOR Default Instructor Role

Listed below are the Instructor Roles to be created by <Customer Name> along with notes from
workshop discussions.

System Admin > Security > Role Management

Instructor Role ID Description


(30 Char) (100 Char)
<Customer Name>_INSTRUCTOR <Customer Name> Instructor

DEFAULT <Customer
Menu
INSTRUCTOR Name>_INSTRUCTOR
ACCESS SCHEDULED OFFERINGS
ADD WALK INS

34
DEFAULT <Customer
Menu
INSTRUCTOR Name>_INSTRUCTOR
EDIT VIRTUAL LEARNING ACCOUNT
INITIATE EVALUATION
PRINT ROSTER
RECORD ATTENDANCE
RECORD LEARNING
RECORD LEARNING FOR ADHOC
CLASSES
VIEW SCHEDULED OFFERING
DOCUMENTS

Notes

35
4. User Management
Users are represented by database records which contain not only detailed demographic
information (usually captured from an HR system of record), but also tied to a transcript of all
completed training and non-training events (learning history). For an individual (employee or
non-employee) to access online content or register for instructor led offerings, the individual
must have a User record in SuccessFactors Learning. Make note in the document for the
specific plans or no plans for using the User Connector, and if used, identify the User Connector
workbook location or name in the Appendices. If the LMS is to be integrated with BizX, the
specific BizX User Connector should be used.

4.1 User Attributes


Most User attributes are searchable, an attribute may be used on its own or combined with
several others to assign and report on training. Assigning can be both manual and automated
(described later in this document). The following table summarizes the fields on a User record.
A separate User connector workbook (if applicable) is used to document actual mapping of data
from the HR source(s) to SuccessFactors Learning. User record attributes are explained in
more detail in the sections following this table.
Automated assignments are managed by Assignment Profiles covered in section 4.5.

4.1.1 User ID
This is the unique case sensitive primary key for the User record in the database. The User ID
is used for the User login into SuccessFactors Learning. User ID naming convention may
distinguish certain types of Users; for example, contractors from the permanent employees.
Discuss how Users are created, and if created manually, identify a naming convention for new
User records. Manually created User IDs may be auto-generated (sequential numeric ID).
Example User ID Source

345322 HR Database
CON-873733 Manually Added by Records Admin

Notes

4.1.2 User Status


User records in SuccessFactors Learning can be set to “active” or “inactive” status. This status
determines whether the record appears in default administrator searches, report results and if it
is considered for automatic training assignment. Record inactivation can be included as a part
of role management and security measures as inactive users are unable to login. Deleting User
records is not recommended (for historical reporting purposes), but if necessary administrators
may delete User records if they have the associated permissions and the User has no
associated records.
36
In this section, discuss the business rules and process for inactivating User records.
Notes

4.1.3 Role (User Role)


User roles determine menu access on the User-side of SuccessFactors Learning. Usually there
is only one User Role assigned to all Users (a default user role). If necessary, additional User
Roles may be created and assigned to Users automatically via Assignment Profiles or via the
User Connector. This is necessary only if certain populations of Users require different
functional / menu to others. User roles are documented in section 3.2 of this configuration
workbook.
Notes

4.1.4 Comments
The comments field on the User record is administrator-facing and may be used at the
administrator’s discretion. Comments are sometimes used to document changes that
administrators make to a User record that deviate from the normal business processes.
Notes

4.1.5 Primary Supervisor


A User’s primary supervisor is identified by the supervisor reference on the User’s record.
Additional supervisors can be defined for any employee (Alternate Supervisor). This allows
organizations to model their structure even when matrix relationships are present. The existing
supervisor or an administrator can define these relationships. Supervisors may have additional
workflows to perform on subordinate records such as assigning and recording learning. If an
administrator changes a User’s supervisor and that prior supervisor had pending approvals,
SuccessFactors Learning will prompt the administrator to choose to re-route the pending
approvals to the new supervisor (this can be automated via the User Connector). Supervisor ID
is an available attribute for Assignment Profiles.
Supervisors will have the ability to delegate their responsibilities to other users. Delegation is
dealt with in role management and under notifications that can be sent out.
As of 1611 you can configure your system to understand that when a supervisor assigns
something, that also means that the supervisor approves of the assignment. When employee
requests approval for an Online Item, Blended Item or External Course assigned by Supervisor,
the Supervisor Approval step is flagged as “Waived.” (Contrary to this, as of 1705, Approval
Processes for Supervisor enrollments can be enforced)
Notes

37
4.1.6 Alternate Supervisor
Separate to delegation, a Supervisor (and an administrator) can add other users as an alternate
supervisor for any of their subordinates. Alternate Supervisors can perform the same actions on
the target User only as this function does not filter down the hierarchy like the Primary
Supervisor. Alternate Supervisors are not available as an attribute for Assignment Profiles.

Notes

4.1.7 HR Business Partner


The HR Business Partner (HRBP) is a user-side role different from the Primary/Alternate
Supervisor but has functionality that is similar to the alternate supervisor including approvals
and employee data access.
HRBP are HR managers assigned to an employee and in the context of Learning are
responsible for managing learning for their employees. This role is typically found in larger
organizations.
HRBP-User mapping is managed in the System via the User Connector. HRBP can manage
their employees via an interface similar to the Supervisor interface. HRBPs can view the list of
all employees they are managing, browse their learning plans and perform actions such as
Assign/Remove Learning, Record Learning, and Register/Withdraw employees in scheduled
offerings.
HRBP access to all learning management functions is controlled by the same workflows as
those for Supervisors. If an HRBP is also a Supervisor, s/he can toggle between two views to
manage both groups of employees on My Employees. Administrators can view the HRBPs
associated with a User on the Manage Alternate Supervisor screen.

Notes

4.1.8 Gender
Gender is an optional referenced attribute. The supported values are M and F. Gender is not
an available attribute for Assignment Profiles.
Notes

4.1.9 Job Title


Job Title is not directly tied to Job Code but may be used as part of the User connector or
manually updated to record the title of the Users Job Code. Job Title is not a searchable field
and is not an available attribute for Assignment Profiles. There is no reference table that needs
population.

38
Notes

4.1.10 Job Code


A job code is a job title in your organization. From a single job code, you may choose to create
multiple positions, each position an instance of the job code. Assign job codes to positions and
users to aid in manual or automated assignment and reporting. Job Codes may have a direct
with Curricula for auto-assign function. Users may have only one primary Job Codes, prior to
6.4, were called Job Positions.
User Management > Job Codes

Example Job Code ID Description


(50 Char) (100 Char)

FIN-100876 Account Manager

Notes

4.1.11 Job Code Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Job Codes custom columns fields will improve the administrators’ ability to track company-
specific information related to Job Codes. Use the table below to list Job Code custom columns.
Column numbers are usually listed in increments of 10 to allow for future custom columns within
the range. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing
administrators to have a more thorough localized experience.

System Admin > Custom Columns > Job Codes

Label Col # Referenced

Legacy Job Code 10 Y

Notes

4.1.12 Job Families


Job Families are records that contain Job Codes. This allows for more efficient searching and
reporting where many Job Codes exist with a similar attribute. Job Codes may belong to more
than one group. (Global Table). The is Legacy Functionality associated to previous Plateau
Succession functionality.

39
User Management > Job Families

Job Family ID Description


(30 Char) (100 Char)

SALES Sales Organizations

4.1.13 Job Positions


In most cases, each position is an instance of a job code and each position is occupied by one
user. For example, if your company has ten civil engineers and all ten civil engineers share a
job code, then you create ten positions, each associated with the one "civil engineer" job code.
Positions are critical to workforce planning and Succession Planning as they describe how
many positions exist for a job code also indicating how many are open. Because they are
hierarchical, positions show a career path. Job Positions were introduced to support the Legacy
Plateau Performance Modules. In an integrated LMS / BizX environment any related
functionality is expected to be redundant.

4.1.14 Job Location


The Job Location is not directly tied to Job Code ID and is usually mapped to an employee’s
office location in the HR system of record. Job Location is an available attribute for Assignment
Profiles.
References > User Management > Job Locations

Example Job Location ID Description


(30 Char) (40 Char)

DC Washington DC Office

Notes

4.1.15 Is Full-Time
Full-Time is a flag on the User record available for use when searching for Users and as an
attribute for Assignment Profiles. The field was introduced primarily to support the French
Government Reporting requirements see section Government Reporting.
Notes

4.1.16 Regular / Temp


Regular/Temp is a flag on the User record available for use when searching for Users and as an
attribute for Assignment Profiles. The field was introduced primarily to support the French
Government Reporting requirements, see section Government Reporting.
References > User Management > Regular / Temp ID

40
Regular / Temp ID Description
(30 Char) (40 Char)

Notes

4.1.17 Employee Type


Employee type is another way to categorize Users, and usually represents a pay type or
employee/contractor differentiation. Employee Type is an available attribute for Assignment
Profiles.
References > User Management > Employee Types

Employee Type ID Description


(30 Char) (40 Char)
CNTR Contractor
HOUR Hourly Employee
INTERN Intern Employee
PERM Permanent
PT Part Time
TEMP Temporary

Notes

4.1.18 Employee Status


The employee status is typically used to indicate the current relationship of a User to the
business. This field is often used in assignment profiles to distinguish between employees with
other criteria in common. For example, grant catalogue access to all employees in a specified
organization if their employee status = ‘Full Time.’
References > User Management > Employee Statuses

Employee Status ID Description


(30 Char) (40 Char)
LEAVE On leave

41
Employee Status ID Description
(30 Char) (40 Char)
FT Full Time
MAT Maternity Leave

Notes

4.1.19 Region
Regions are associated with User, facility, and instructor records. Region is also a searchable
criterion used by administrators to find and report on Users, instructors and facility records. This
attribute may be included as an attribute in assignment profiles.
Below are regions chosen by <Customer Name> and comments on how they may be used.
User Management > Regions

Region ID Description
(30 Char) (100 Char)

NE Northeast
LDN London

Notes

4.1.20 Resume
This field may contain a path to a resume location on a network drive. It will not be a hyperlink
in the SuccessFactors application; it will simply display the path information. Not commonly
used and unavailable as an attribute for Assignment Profiles.
Notes

4.1.21 Hire Date


Hire Date may be used as part of an Assignment Profile for assigning training to Users who fall
within a hire date window. Administrators may search for users by hire date (using “before”
and/or “after” operators). The system can be configured (setting in the LMS_ADMIN file) to
accept a hire date in the future should there be a business need to create/update users with a
future hire date.

42
Notes

4.1.22 Termination Date


The Termination date may be populated when a User is terminated and becomes an inactive
record in SuccessFactors Learning. Inactive Users may be reactivated with all historical
information intact if the User is re-hired. Termination Date is unavailable as an attribute for
Assignment Profiles.
Notes

4.1.23 Related Instructor


Related Instructor is a link to the instructor resource record. This is a one to one relationship
and does not provide the user access to the administrator interface. This link will allow the user
to approve a learning event (not a registration) if that user was the instructor in the scheduled
offering and eSignatures are in use. Related Instructor is not an attribute available for
Assignment Profiles.
Notes

4.1.24 Address, City, Postal Code


This is typically only used to capture the address information that is used in SF-182 (separately
licensed module). Address is available as an attribute for Assignment Profiles.
Notes

4.1.25 Country
Countries are associated with User’s main, shipping, and billing addresses. Country is available
as an attribute for Assignment Profiles.
Below are countries to be created by <Customer Name>.
References > Geography > Countries

Country ID Description
(100 Char) (100 Char)

US United States

Notes

43
4.1.26 Email address
SuccessFactors offers the ability to notify Users automatically through various system triggers
and manually via ad-hoc notifications. To receive email notifications, Users must have an email
address specified for their record. Email address is unavailable as an attribute for Assignment
Profiles.
Notes

4.1.27 Phone Number


Each User record may have an unlimited number of phone numbers. However, each phone
number must be unique – there cannot be two identical phone numbers with different
descriptions.
Note: The User Interface Supervisor Org chart displays a phone number for subordinate users.
This number is always the first numerically (phone number value – not description). To control
which phone number is displayed first on the Org Chart, an alpha-numeric character such as a
hyphen can be used as a prefix to the number so that phone number will be displayed first.
Phone Numbers are unavailable as an attribute for Assignment Profiles.
Notes

4.1.28 Alternate Job Codes


Additional Job Code IDs may be listed on the Alternate Job Codes tab of a User’s record.
These alternate Job Code references do not auto-assign curricula or competency profiles like
the Job Code ID specified on the summary tab can. However, used in conjunction with
Assignment Profiles (section 4.5), Users may be assigned curricula, catalogues, and
competency profiles using alternate Job Code(s) as a criterion.
Notes
NOTE: Located under Related section in user’s record.

4.1.29 User Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


User custom columns are used to capture additional information about Users which is not
captured in any ‘out of the box’ field. Custom column may be referenced and may be populated
by the HR connector (if applicable). Administrators may use custom columns for searching and
assigning purposes, including the assignment profile. Custom field labels and reference
descriptions can be translated allowing administrators to have a more thorough localized
experience.
*After adding a User custom column, the Assignment Profile Synchronization APM must run to
update the new custom column in the assignment profile attribute list (see section 11.1).
System Admin > Custom Columns > User

44
Col Ref. ID Value or
Label Referenced Source
# Field Description

HR Database Supervisor’s Employee


Prior Supervisor 10 N
(Prior Sup) ID
Y (Yes)
Is Supervisor? 20 Y HR Database NULL (is not a
supervisor)
1(Grade 1),2(Grade
Job Grade 30 Y HR Database 2),3(Grade 3),4 (Grade
4),5 (Grade 5).

Notes

4.2 Organizations
Organizations are one of two hierarchical structures in which Users reside. (The domain
structure is the other, discussed later). Users’ association with organizations allows for greater
searching, reporting, and training assignment, and financial transaction capability.
Defining organizations usually follows one of two approaches: 1) Mirror the domain structure but
define organizations at a deeper level. 2) Cross-cut the domain structure to allow for a different
assignment and reporting perspective. Organizations are directly associated with scheduling
slots (see section Error: Reference source not found). If anticipating using slots frequently, a
simplified organization structure is recommended

Example 1: Organizations mirror domain structure but extend to a deeper level.

45
Example 2: Organizations span domains allowing for different assignment and reporting
perspective.

Example organizations are listed below. Discussion on the use of organizations has been
captured below in the Notes.
User Management > Organizations

Example
Description
Organization ID
(100 Char)
(30 Char)

100_2_001 Finance and Accounting

Notes

4.2.1 Organization Group


Organization Groups are records that contain organizations. This allows for more efficient
searching and reporting in a complex organization structure. Organizations may belong to more
than one group. (Global Table).
User Management > Organization Groups

Example Organization Group


Description
ID
(100 Char)
(30 Char)

SALES Sales Organizations

4.2.2 Organization Type


Organization Types are categories for organizations. Administrators may search for
organizations with common organization types. (Global Table)
User Management > Organization Type

46
Example Organization Type
Description
ID
(100 Char)
(30 Char)

CORP Corporate Organizations

Notes

4.2.3 Organization Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Custom columns allow SuccessFactors administrators to capture additional information about
organization records. Use the table below to list organization custom columns. Column
numbers are usually listed in increments of 10 to allow for future custom columns within the
range. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing administrators
to have a more thorough localized experience.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Organization

Ref. ID Value or Field


Label Col # Referenced
Description
Office 10 N Headquarters

Notes

4.2.4 Organization Based Headers and Footers


The Administrator can define a different User Notification Header and Footer based on the
User’s organizational relationship. This means users that sit in different organizations but are
receiving the same notification email out of the application can now have distinct Header and
Footer messages associated to their organization’s requirement.
The notification header and footer are hierarchical, which means the admin can set the header
and footer information at the topmost organization record in the tree, and the update will apply
to all sub-organizations of that parent and the users that roll up to it.
The header and footer support HTML.
Note: Organization Headers and Footers are enabled by the setting in the LMS_ADMIN file
then configured on the individual Organization record.

47
4.2.5 Configurable “From” email address by Organization
Many customers desire to have different email notification styling based on the Organization of
the user. For example, a hotel company with different hotel brands may configure a custom
header and footer for each brand that applies to all outgoing email. Beginning in the Q1
release, admins can also configure the "From" email address to be specific to the user's
Organization. In our example, the sender for all system generated emails will be an email
address specific to the user's Hotel Brand, rather than the parent Hotel Company.
Prerequisite:
Enable Org level from address=true

Notes

48
4.3 Groups
Groups are a mechanism to bundle selected users together to ease administration.
Users cannot be added to groups manually/directly, must be done through assignment profiles.

4.3.1 Group Impact areas/functionality


Groups have commerce association to allow for slot commerce purchase (same as Orgs):

 Shopping Account ID
 Internal vs. External shopping account type with enabling flag
 Billing and Shipping Address association
 Groups have Account Code association to allow for slot commerce purchase validation
(same as Orgs)

Groups can now be used to reserve scheduled offering slots. Users that are part of that group
can automatically register under the available slot seats.

4.3.2 Other Impact Areas


 User Registration
o When a user belongs to an Organization, and a Group that both have slot seats
available in the same Scheduled Offering, the Organization's available seats will
take precedence in registration
o Supervisor registration wizard will also include available Group Slot seats

49
 Registration Assistant
o Reserve slot type will include option to reserve based on Group Slot

 Commerce
o Slot Orders generated for Groups will also be identified as “Slotting” orders in
Order Management

 Reporting
o New report called Slot Status by Groups

o Updated Slot Status by Scheduled Offering and Financial Transaction CSV


report to include Group Slot data

 Record Configuration

4.3.3 Related Workflows


Admin:

 Search Groups
 Add Groups
 Delete Groups
 Edit Groups
 Edit Assignment Profile Groups
 View Groups
 View Assignment Profile Groups

4.4 Class
Classes are groups of Users who typically proceed through Scheduled Offerings together. The
class entity allows Users to be auto-enrolled in the Scheduled Offerings associated with it, and
automatically assigns a Curriculum to the Users. Users who are removed from the class are
withdrawn from the offerings and the Curriculum is unassigned. If instructor led training is not
tracked, classes are one way to create an Admin-defined group of Users (for searching and
reporting).
Learning > Classes

Example Class ID Description


(30 Char) (100 Char)
HR_NewHire_200 2009 New Hire Cohort
9

50
Notes

4.4.1 Class Status


Administrators may change a User’s class status, which is used as an indicator of the User’s
progress. Class status is a referenced table that must be populated. Class status is not
automatically applied based upon the User attending or completing Scheduled Offerings
associated with the Class. Rather, class status must be manually updated by an administrator
in the Class record. A Users’ Class Status may be accessed in report form (Reports > Class
Progress) but is not part of any other SuccessFactors functionality. Below is a list of class
statuses.
References > Learning > Class Status

Class Status ID Description


(30 char) (40 char)

On Target User is meeting expectations.

4.4.2 Class Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Class custom columns are used to capture additional information about classes. Custom field
labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing administrators to have a more
thorough localized experience.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Class

Ref. ID Value or
Label Col # Referenced
Field Description
Q1-2007
Period 10 Y
Q2-2007

Notes

4.5 Assignment Profiles


Assignment Profiles are created by administrators for the purpose of assigning various entities
to Users who match the attributes selected. Once an assignment profile is created and
propagated, the Assignment Profile Synchronization APM (section 11.1) must be scheduled to
run. This APM checks Users for matches to assignment profiles and assigns (or un-assigns)
the appropriate entities. Therefore, assignment profiles allow on-going automatic training
assignment to new Users and Users whose attributes change.

51
When creating an assignment profile, the administrator must; (1) specify what domain(s) are
affected by this assignment profile; (2) identify the User attributes to select the appropriate
group of Users, and (3) specify what entities are to be assigned to those Users.
Administrators can inactivate an assignment profile and have the added option of un-assigning
the learning elements assigned through the assignment profile. Inactivated assignment profiles
can be re-propagated to become active again.
What Can You Assign?
Assignment Profiles can assign the following entities:
 Catalogs
 Competency Profiles
 Coupons
 Curricula
 Items
 Programs
 Recommended Items/Collections/Programs
 User Role
 Group
What is the Best Practice?
You can use a single assignment profile to assign more than one type of entity. It may be
better, organizationally, to define only a single entity type to an assignment profile.

4.5.1 Assignment Profile Attributes


Assignment profile attribute Examples of how you can use the
attributes
Domain ID A common way to pool users is to set the
domain scope, which is required to limit the
selection set of users and then also set a
domain as a selection criterion.
Organization ID Organizations are useful grouping
mechanisms for both including and excluding
users from an assignment pool. For example,
you can put all users in a manufacturing
organization into a pool.
Job Code ID If you need all safety officers to receive the
same training, and safety officer is a job
code, you can assign the learning to users
based on their job code.

52
Assignment profile attribute Examples of how you can use the
attributes
Alternate Job Code ID Many companies use an alternate job code
ID, particularly in manufacturing. If you need
all safety officers to receive the same training,
and safety officer is a job code, you might
want to assign the learning to users
regardless of whether Safety Officer is their
primary or alternate job code.
Address You often group users by their location - for
example all users in a physical address
should receive the same courses.
City You often group users by their location - for
example all users in a city should receive the
same courses.
State You often group users by their location - for
example all users in a state should receive
the same courses.
Postal Code You often group users by their location - for
example all users in a postal code should
receive the same courses. Postal Code is
useful when you want to divide a state. For
example, you could add all postal codes
around a city to include the suburbs and
nearby towns as well as the city.
Country You often group users by their location - for
example all users in a country should receive
the same courses.
Job Location ID Although job location seems important to
assign users in a region to courses, many
customers use address fields instead
because they offer a more precise selection
attribute. Depending on your implementation,
however, job location can be a useful
selection attribute. For example, a user with a
home office might have an address in Berlin
but a job location in London. You might want
to assign learning based on the location
where the user is assigned (London) instead
of the physical location of the person (Berlin).

53
Assignment profile attribute Examples of how you can use the
attributes
Region ID Region ID is not often used to assign courses
to users because region is most often created
to locate training facilities and instructors.
While users can also be in a region, their
region usually does not match their location
as closely as their physical address.
Employee Type ID Employee types are set during
implementation and they reflect your
business model. They can be, for example,
full time, contractors, contingent workers, and
so on. You often want to assign courses to all
full-time employees, for example, and not to
contractors or contingent workers.
Employee Status ID Employee status (full time or part time) is not
typically used because Employee Type
includes these types of employees (full time
and part time) and that list matches your
business more closely.
Is Full-Time Is full-time is not typically used because
Employee Type includes these types of
employees (full time) and that list matches
your business more closely.
Regular/Temp The regular/temp indicator is not typically
used because Employee Type includes these
types of employees (full time employees and
temporary or contingent employees) and that
list matches your business more closely.
Hire Date Hire date can be used, for example, for
retraining: if you want to assign courses to all
users who were hired more than five years
ago.
Hire Month  
Item Completion (opt. “Include Substitute Item completions are a common way to
Completions”) assign the next course. For example, if you
have a set of mechanics in job code, you can
pool the mechanics who completed the
“Basic Diesel Maintenance” course, so that
you can assign them the “Advanced Diesel
Maintenance” course.

54
Assignment profile attribute Examples of how you can use the
attributes
User ID User ID is useful for both including and
excluding specific people from an assignment
profile. For example, if you want to assign a
course to everyone in Japan except for
executives, you can exclude the executives
by user ID.
Supervisor ID Supervisor ID is not as useful as a selection
as other user attributes, but assignment
profiles can find all users who share a
manager.
All User Custom Columns Many customers create custom columns
(custom fields) that store custom user
attributes.

4.5.2 Assignment Profile Operators


Assignment Profile Operators
Matches (Not for Hire Date/Month, Item Completion
and Is Full-Time)
Between (For Hire Date only)
Contains (Not for Hire Date/Month, Item Completion
and Is Full-Time)
Is Empty* (Not for Hire Month, Item Completion and Is
Full-Time)
Equals (For Hire Date/Month, Item Completion and Is
Full-Time)
Includes Sub Records of (Domain and Org only)
Starts With (Not for Hire Date/Month, Item Completion
and Is Full-Time)
Does Not Match (Not for Hire Date/Month, Item Completion
and Is Full-Time)
Does Not Contain (Not for Hire Date/Month, Item Completion
and Is Full-Time)
Is Not Empty (Not for Hire Month, Item Completion and Is
Full-Time)
Does Not Equal (For Hire Date and Item Completion only)

55
Assignment Profile Operators
Does Not Start With (Not for Hire Date/Month, Item Completion
and Is Full-Time)
On or After (For Hire Date only)
On or Before (For Hire Date only)
Include Indirect Reports of (For Supervisor only)

* ‘Is Empty’ Does not work with User Custom Column Values

User Management > Assignment Profiles

Assignment Profile ID Description


Attributes
(50 char) (100 char)
Group 1:
Domain ‘include sub Assigns the global catalog to all Users at
CAT_ALL_GENERAL
domains’ = General
GENERAL

56
Assignment Profile ID Description
Attributes
(50 char) (100 char)
Group 1: Assigns the 2009 New Hire Orientation
CURR_NHO_2009_H
Hire Date ‘On or curriculum to all 2009 New Hires in the HR
R
After’ JAN/01/2009’ domain

Notes

An assignment profile naming convention suggestion is to include a prefix to indicate that the
assignment profile is assigning a curriculum (CURR_), a User role (ROLE_), competency
profile (CPCY_), or a catalog (CAT_). See samples in table above.
Potential prefixes to be used in the naming convention for manually created/assigned
assignment profiles:

 CURR - (for curriculum) + general curriculum description


 CAT - (for catalog) + catalog title
 CPCY- (for competency profile) + competency profile title
 ROLE - (for User role) + User role title
 ITEM - (for item) +Item title
 COUP - (for coupon) +coupon name
 REC – For recommended items/programs

5. Learning Management
5.1 Catalogs
Catalogs control which Items and Curricula Users can self-assign and limit the Scheduled
Offerings in which Users may self-register. Catalog access is transparent to the Users, in that
one or many catalogs may be assigned to a User – but they cannot determine this via the User
interface. The Catalog has search and link functionality and is located about Easy Links on the
User interface. Users only see the subject areas for the items assigned, the items, and the
Curricula which reside in all the catalogs. The Link will bring the user to a view of the Browse
catalog form. The user can also search from here or go to the Advanced Search area or the
Calendar of Offerings area. The user can click on ‘Search’ to return to the browse form at any
time. Catalogs are assigned via assignment profiles and therefore can be assigned to almost
any unique population of Users. For example, a general access catalog may be assigned to all
employees while another catalog may be assigned to all the members of a specified
organization. Catalogs may be even be assigned to Users with certain Job Codes in common.

57
The table below identifies which catalogs <Customer Name> may create and the User
populations who should receive the catalog assignment. Assignment profiles must be created
that target the User populations which need access to the catalogs.
Learning > Catalogs

Catalog ID Description
Assigned to
(30 Char) (100 Char)
Users in the FIN
All Finance Related Items, Curricula and Scheduled
FINANCE organization and all
Offerings
its child orgs
All Users in all
GEN General Access
domains
Description
(100 Char)

Notes

5.1.1 Catalog Browse (1611)


The catalog is the means of engaging a learner to interact and self-discover with all furnished
learning. To entice the user to continue to learn and develop, they must be engaged into a
delightful experience.
The Catalog Browse feature allows users to browse featured/recommended and highly rated
courses as well as browse by topic (subject area). Prior to the Q4 2015 release, the ‘Browse all
courses’ link from the Find learning tile performs a blank search that brings back all courses in
the user’s catalog(s). When catalog browse is enabled, ‘Browse all courses will navigate the
user to the new browse catalog flow. Catalog browse does not impact the home page
Recommendations or Featured tiles.
We changed the display of cards in catalog search results to display better for customers who
do NOT use Commerce features. Also, we now allow you to set the default catalog results for
users. You can set their default to a card view or a list view.

58
Highly rated courses:

 Includes any active learning, with rating higher than 3 stars


 Sorted by rating, highest first
 The ‘Enable User Ratings’ setting must be enabled for Items or Programs
 Positioned before ‘Recommended for you’ and above ‘Featured Learning’

Browse by topic (subject area):

 Displays all courses associated to the selected topic or sub-topic


 Courses are grouped by category
 Ability to search within a topic

59
Featured or Recommended courses:

 Banner includes up to 5 flagged, active featured courses


 Featured Learning grouping includes featured, new, or revised flagged active courses
 Recommended for you grouping includes the same contents as recommended tile on
the home page excluding non-catalog content such as external links

5.1.2 Catalog 3.0 (1705)


We continue to enhance the overall user experience within the new catalog through design as
well as bringing additional information. For this release we updated the catalog search and
browse experience by:
 Displaying the Feature Reason in the detail view

 Including Instructor Led Session information for OCN courses

 Enhancing the pre-requisites information layout. Please also see 5.2.21

60
61
 Better management of the image thumbnails depending on the uploaded orientation

 Catalog targeted direct links are now supported in the new catalog view
 New Calendar view

62
Catalog Card View:

Expanded Pre-Requisites:

Admins can configure prefix characters to be ignored in single keyword searches to handle
naming conventions in your course catalog. For example, you can configure the search to
ignore a square brace: [. When users search for the string PM-GM, the search finds PM-GM,
63
but it also finds [PM-GM. If you use character conventions in your learning items, add the
characters to the search configuration.

Note: Catalog Browse is enabled by the setting in the CATALOG file (System
Admin>Configuration>System Configuration>CATALOG).

Notes

5.1.3 Topic Banner Configuration


Topic Banners (tied to the Subject Area Reference) can be can be configured with a text label
and a colored background to make the topic more appealing.

5.1.4 Catalog –User Generated Content

Setting this flag to “Yes” in a catalog allows user created content to ne automatically included in
the catalog. This applies to:

 Collections

64
 Quick Guides (once published)

5.2 Items
Items are the building blocks of SuccessFactors learning management. They are the
assignable units which typically represent all forms of training activities, including online and
instructor led courses. They may also be used to represent non-training activities such as
meetings and certifications as well as material goods (such as workbooks) made available for
Users for purchase. When assigned to Users (via one of the many methods of assignment
including User self-assignment), items populate Users’ Learning Plans. Once an item is
completed, a Learning Event is recorded against it and the item moves onto the User’s Learning
History / Completed Work. Therefore, items are referenced by Completed successful or
unsuccessful training events listed in the User’s historical transcript.

5.2.1 Item Classification


Item classifications determine how the item is used and are automatically determined by
SuccessFactors when the item is created and configured. There are five classifications in the
system: Instructor-Led now called Scheduled Only, Online only, Blended now called Scheduled
and Online, Other (i.e., physical goods), and External-Course (only used for Open Content
Network items – see section Error: Reference source not found). Items with online content
(content objects and/or exam objects are classified as ‘Online.’ Items with instructor led
segments are classified as ‘Instructor Led.’ Items with both segments and online content are
classified as “Blended.” Only Items with Instructor-led or Blended Classifications may be
scheduled in SuccessFactors Learning. If there are no segments and no content, the Item is
classified as “Other.” It is recommended to identify segment/s in the Item Delivery Data tab for
instructor-led items. Items of Type “Other” can be used in conjunction with Task Checklists to
allow a User to act as an observer against and record a Learning Event against an Item on
another User’s Learning Plan see the section Tasks.

65
5.2.2 Item Type
Item type determines the first of the three-part unique item identifier (Item Key):

Item type is also directly associated with Item Completion Statuses. For example, when an
administrator records completion for the item type ‘COURSE,’ the completion status options
could be ‘Complete,’ ‘Incomplete’ or ‘Waiver Granted.’ Some item types may have different
grading options also, for example, a numeric grade may be used instead of a completion status.
When an administrator records completion for this item type, a numeric value must be entered
for each User which equates to a completion status as defined at the item type record level.
Since it is possible to have several attributes against an Item to describe it to Users and Admins
other than differing Grading Options the main need for having multiple Item Types is if Item
Completion Statuses should be described differently to be more meaningful to the User, e.g. an
Item Type of ‘EXAM’ may have related Completion Statuses of ‘Passed’ and ‘Failed’. To limit
the number of Completion Statuses in the system it is recommended to keep the number of Item
Types to a minimum where possible and avoid unnecessary complexity, often one Item Type
e.g. ‘COURSE’ is sufficient.

66
The table below contains a list of item types chosen by <Customer Name>:
References > Learning > Item Types

Item Type ID Grading Description


(30 char) Option (40 char)
COURSE None Course
EXAM None Exam
SEMINAR None Seminar
SOP None Standard Operating Procedure

Notes

5.2.3 Item ID
The table below consists of a list of item ID naming conventions that apply to items created by
administrators and those migrated from other sources. Defined are the rules associated with
the creation of the records. Identify whether the <Customer Name> will use auto generate for
IDs.
Example Item ID Naming Convention
Owner(s)
(30 char) (40 char)
HR_001_Onboardin
HR 2Char Dept_3Char Sequential#_Course Title
g
2CharRegional Office ID-3Char DeptID-3Char
NA-IT-SEC-001 IT
Subject-Sequential#

Notes

67
5.2.4 Completion Status
When administrators record successful completion for items (learning events), they must
choose from a list of completion statuses associated with the item type (see Item Types above).
Completion statuses are set to provide credit or not. An example of a ‘not for credit’ completion
status is an item failure status. It is a best practice to create a ‘substitute’ or ‘waiver’ completion
status if using substitute relationships between items. This allows the administrator to properly
record a completion achieved through completion of another item and is documented as such.
Listed below are completion statuses chosen by <Customer Name>.
For automatic assignment of level 1 and 3 evaluations (see page Error: Reference source not
found) to work when learning events are recorded, the flags for Item Evaluation and/or Follow-
up Evaluation must be set. Some completion statuses, such as failures or substitutes, should
not necessarily trigger a survey.
An administrator can determine whether an approval process should be used for a specific
completion status. If approval processes are desired for completion of items, the e-sig
functionality must be turned on globally. The e-sig process will trigger the approval process. If
e-sig is not turned on (this is a global setting), the system will not display the drop-down box for
the approval process within the completion status record.
TIP! Keep the completion status ID as short as possible. Keep the description as simple as
possible. The course completion statuses are a good example of this concept. The learning
event recorder for multiple items has a dropdown for the completion status which will be wide
enough to contain the completion status ID concatenated with the description along with
whether the status is for credit or not for credit. The dropdown width can get very wide if the ID
and description are long values and cause the display to have a vertical scroll bar.
References > Learning > Completion Status

Triggers Approval
Completion Trigge
Description Follow- Process
Status ID Item rs Item
Credit up Enable
(40 char) Type Evalua
(30 char) Evaluati ESig
tion
on
COURSE_C COUR Y Y N N
OMPLETE Complete SE Y
COURSE_S COUR N N N N
UBSTITUTE Substitute SE Y
COURSE_IN COUR Y N N N
COMPLETE Incomplete SE N
COURSE_N COUR N N N N
OSHOW No Show SE N

EXAM-PASS Exam Pass EXAM Y Y Y N N

68
Triggers Approval
Completion Trigge
Description Follow- Process
Status ID Item rs Item
Credit up Enable
(40 char) Type Evalua
(30 char) Evaluati ESig
tion
on
EXAM-FAIL Exam Fail EXAM N Y N N N

SEMR- Seminar SEMIN Y Y N N


COMPLETE Complete AR Y
Seminar SEMIN N N N N
SEMR-SUB Substitute AR Y
SEMR- SEMIN Y N N N
INCOMPLET Seminar AR
E Incomplete N

SOP- SOP Y Y N N
COMPLETE Complete SOP Y
SOP N N N N
SOP-SUB Substitute SOP Y
SOP- Y N N N
INCOMPLET SOP
E Incomplete SOP N

Notes
Completion Status descriptions allow for use in multiple languages add as required.

5.2.5 Item Revision Date and Time


When new items are created, the server date and time are defaults for this field and becomes
the last part of the item key. Using the Revision Assistant administrators may revise items,
creating a new item with a different date/time stamp (and the same item type and ID as the
previous revision). Revising an Item is an important tool when item content is significantly
updated, and the business needs to have a permanent record of which Users completed which
Item version. Users may be forced to complete the most recent Item version to maintain
compliance.
Notes

69
5.2.6 Revision Number
Revision numbers prefix the Date/Time stamp in the Item Key. Revision numbers are not
incrementally pre-populated when revising an Item, as different numbering methods may be in
place across organizations; SuccessFactors alerts administrators when revising an Item if the
revision number was not manually adjusted, but administrators may proceed with the revision
provided the new Date/Time stamp is not identical to the last revision of the Item. The Revision
number is a label with no related functionality as the revision process is purely related to the
Revision Date. Below are notes on Item revision numbering conventions:
Notes

5.2.7 Item Status


Items are active by default, but administrators may set items to an inactive status if desired.
Once an item is inactive, it will not appear in the results of default item searches (but
administrators may choose to search for and access inactive item records). If configured as
part of the security model (section 2.1), some administrator roles may be restricted from
accessing inactive records (record state restriction). Used in conjunction with an item revision
process, inactivating previous revisions is an effective way to eliminate User launch of outdated
online content.
Note: Although a state restriction exists for the ‘Add Item’ workflow (allowing administrators to
add Item records as inactive only), the Add Item Wizard does not allow the admin to add
inactive records. Item records must be created as active, and only when added, made inactive
if required by business rules.
Notes

5.2.8 Item Thumbnail Photos


This functionality allows a customer to display a custom thumbnail image to represent the item.
This can be a URL or a photo that is uploaded to the database. Typically, this could be used to
represent the vendor, or Sources (formerly Item Source), or delivery method. The images are
displayed on the Learning Plan, Item Details, Curriculum Details, and Catalog search results.
Item thumbnail custom imagery must first be enabled globally (LMS_ADMIN file). Once globally
enabled, admin can choose what is displayed to users if a custom image is not uploaded.
Users can be shown either global default icons or photos (representing the four Item
Classifications).

70
How to Use
An administrator can define a Thumbnail URL (a URL that directs to the graphic image) or
Thumbnail File (browse and upload the image file) in the Summary area of an item record.
Although we still support a 1:1 thumbnail aspect ratio for content, we recommend that you use
16:9 ratio.
Example
Here is an example of a vendor course with a thumbnail image.

Notes

5.2.9 HTML Item Descriptions


HTML formatting can be added to item descriptions to be displayed to users. This allows
admins to format the descriptions to make them more visually appealing and organized. HTML
descriptions are visible on the Item Details page, Catalog Search Results, and Learning Plan. It
displays as plain text elsewhere such as in reports.
The following HTML formatting is supported:

 Bold
 Italics
 Underline
 Bulleted List
 Numbered List
 Font Color
 Font Background Color
 Links
Note: HTML Descriptions is enabled by the setting in the LMS_ADMIN file (setting applies to
both Item and Curriculum). There is a secondary configuration for security associated to the
HTML in the WEB_SECURITY file which can be left disabled if there is no concern on security.

Notes

5.2.10 Item Cover Page


Administrators can create custom HTML enabled landing pages for items which provide admins
the tools they need to deliver tailored information about an item to end users. A source code
71
view provides added design flexibility. The cover pages can also be created in different
languages for international audiences.
Admins can access the cover page on the Item record. They can choose one of three available
layouts and make edits to each content area of the layout. A Preview button is also available to
view the edits. Once changes are saved the admin can activate the cover page and make it
visible to end users.
Item cover pages are supported only with the Recommended User Interface Display feature
enabled.

Notes

5.2.11 Sources (formerly Item Source)


The Sources (formerly Item Source) identifies the origin of an Item and is an optional field which
could be used for administrator searches. When searching / browsing the Catalog, the User
can filter by Sources (formerly Item Source). Listed below are Sources (formerly Item Source)
chosen by <Customer Name>.
References > Learning > Sources

Item Source ID Description


(30 char) (40 char)
EXTERNAL External
INTERNAL Internal
SKILLSOFT SkillSoft

Notes

5.2.12 Delivery Method (Method ID)


Method ID refers to the instructional delivery method. This does not determine the behavior of
the item as does Item Classification. It could be used for additional Admin search capability and
is an optional field at the item record level. Listed below are method ID’s chosen by <Customer
Name>. When Searching / Browsing the Catalogue the User can filter by Delivery Methods.
References > Learning > Delivery Methods

72
Delivery Method ID Description
(30 char) (40 char)
BOOK Book
BRIEFING Briefing
CORRESPONDENCE Correspondence
DOC Online or Paper Document
OJT On the Job Training
SIM Simulation
VIDEO Video
VLS Virtual Classroom Event

Notes

5.2.13 Assignment Type


Assignment type determines the Item’s default ‘criticality’ of User completion. When used in a
Curriculum, the Item’s assignment type is inherited by default and determines whether the Item
must be complete for the Curriculum to be complete. Regardless of the preferred terminology
all assignment types map to a required Y/N value which drives the LMS functionality and
determines if a related Item Completion is required or not to achieve Curriculum Completion. A
priority level can also be assigned at the Assignment Type level. This field is displayed to the
User. Below is a list of assignment types chosen by <Customer Name>.
References > Learning > Assignment Types

Requirement Type Priority


Required Description
ID
(range defined by
(Yes/No) (40 char)
(30 char) global maximum)
MGR Yes Manager Required
OPT No Optional
REC No Recommended
REQ Yes Required

73
Notes

5.2.14 Approval Process


Approval processes may be applied to Items, Scheduled Offerings, and Completion Statuses.
They prevent user launch of online content, self-registration in offerings, or recordation of
learning events until approval is granted by other Users specified individually or by role as
defined in the approval process record. When applied to an instructor led item, the approval
process is inherited by the Scheduled Offerings, but may be removed or modified at the offering
record.
Approval processes can also be applied to Scheduled Offerings in the case of withdraw from an
offering. This feature mirrors the capability to require an approval process for offering
registration. The withdraw approval process can be initiated only for an enrolled or waitlisted
user and the user is informed that approval is required and of any refund amount, if applicable.
Once the withdraw request is submitted, withdraw is not performed until the request is approved
and the user is in ‘Pending Withdraw Approval’ status.
Approval processes usually reference approval roles, which must be applied to User records.
All supervisors (as determined by the system reporting structure) automatically have the
Supervisor Level 1 system approval role and all users who are associated with an Instructor
record automatically have the instructor role. There is no need to create a new role for
supervisor levels 1 and 2, instructors or employees. However, all other roles need to be created
and assigned to the appropriate users based on domain or organization. For example, if a
Budget Coordinator must approve registration in Scheduled Offerings, an approval role must be
created and assigned to specific Users. When administrators assign a role to a User, they must
define the domains/organizations for which those Users will approve. The global setting in
section 9.1.1 determines whether domain or organization is used to determine the User
population for approval role control.

Listed in the table below are example approval processes and roles that <Customer Name>
may create.
References > System Admin > Approval Processes

74
Approval Process ID Process Name
(30 Char) (100 Char)
1 Step Supervisor One Level of Approval for Internal Items

Notes

References > System Admin > Approval Processes > Approval Steps

Process ID Approval Step Name


Approval Role / User ID Approval Role / User ID
(30 Char) Step # (100 Char)
1 Step
1 Supervisor Supervisor Level 1 Supervisor Level 1
Supervisor

Notes

References > System Admin > Approval Roles

Approval Role ID Description


(30 Char) (100 Char)
Employee Employee (System default role)
Supervisor Level 1 Supervisor Level 1 (System default role)
Supervisor Level 2 Supervisor Level 2 (System default role)
Instructor Instructor (System default role)
HRBP HR Business Partner (System default role)

Budget Approver Budget Approver

75
Notes

5.2.15 Hours
There are four types of hours associated with items: Credit, Contact, CPE (Continuing
Professional Education) and Total hours. They all behave the same – when a learning event is
recorded for an item, the User is credited for the number of hours of each type set at the item
level unless the administrator overrides the hours at the time the event is recorded. Total hours
are calculated by the number of hours in the delivery data segments of an instructor led item.
Hour types are important when considering the use of Curriculum requirements (section 5.10).
It is best practice for an organization to decide which of the hour types to use for various
purposes.
Notes

5.2.16 E-Signatures
E-Signatures force administrators and Users to enter a secondary authentication (PIN) when
recording learning completion for an item. Before authenticating, learning events for items are
‘unverified.’ Enabling the use of e-signatures for items is a global setting (section 9.1) but must
also be set at each individual item record which is subject to e-signature rules. Approval
Processes can be attached to specific completion statuses, in addition to the e-signature
setting.
If additional approvers have e-signed the learning completion, they are displayed on all screens
that display the Learning History on Admin and User side and on the Item History Audit Report.
If additional approvers have e-signed the learning completion, they are displayed on screens
that display the Learning History on Admin and User-side:
• Admin: User Snapshot > Items Completed > View Details.
• Admin: Users > Tools > Learning Event Editor.
• User: Learning History
In addition, the following fields are included in the Item History Audit Report for up to 7
approvers:
• E-Signature User Name
• Esig Meaning Code
• E-Signature Meaning Code Description
• E-Signature Message
• E-Signature User Comments

76
Notes

5.2.17 Notifications
Administrators may modify the email notifications associated with Scheduled Offerings at the
global level (see section 13.1), the item level, and the Scheduled Offering level. Email
notifications triggered by Scheduled Offering actions include registration, User enrollment status
change, Scheduled Offering segment change and offering cancellation. Administrators may
attach a file to the emails that are delivered by the system.

Notes
Note: there are LMS related notifications in BizX including the Nudge feature which allows
managers to nudge subordinates

5.2.18 Subject Areas


When User’s Search or Browse a catalog (if enabled), the subject areas are listed on the left
side of the page allowing Users to filter the Items displayed. This list contains all the subject
areas associated with items that the User can see (because the item is in a catalog assigned to
them via an assignment profile). The subject area structure is hierarchical, and items may
reside in more than one subject area. Use of subject areas correlates with catalogs and User
self-assignment of items, but it may also be used for Admin item record searches. Competency
records may also be associated with subject areas, as part of an indirect item/Competency
alignment model. Listed below is the subject area taxonomy as defined by <Customer Name>.
Description is the User facing value in the Catalog menu.
Also see Topic Banner Configuration.
References > System Admin > Subject Areas

Subject Area ID Parent Subject Description


(30 char) Area ID (40 char)
Software Software Application Training
Office Software Microsoft Office Products

77
Subject Area ID Parent Subject Description
(30 char) Area ID (40 char)

Notes

5.2.19 Period-Based Item Assignment (Initial Assignment)


When administrators assign items with required assignment types to Users (via any of the item
and Curriculum assignment methods), SuccessFactors uses the Initial Period from the item
record to calculate the required by date (due date). When items reside in a Curriculum, they
may have a Retraining Period associated with them as well, which requires Users to complete
the training on a recurring cycle to maintain Curriculum completion (compliance).
There are two types of period basis settings to choose from: Event Basis and Calendar Basis.
Although no configuration setting must be determined to use either of the calculation methods, it
is best that all learning administrators understand how they work:
The required by date is always calculated based upon the assignment date (for initial period)
or the completion date (for retraining period). From b1207 the initial required date can
optionally be based on user hire date rather than assignment date.
Event Basis
Based upon the assignment date (or completion date for a retraining period) the User has X
number of periods in which to complete the item, before it becomes overdue (item expiration
email sent to User and supervisor, alert on home page). The User always has the remainder
of the current period type (e.g., 1 day, 1 week, 1 quarter, etc.) + the number of periods
defined.

Event Basis Initial Period Examples:

78
Calendar Basis
Calendar based intervals rely upon a Curriculum assignment to calculate properly (required
items with calendar-based intervals will always have a default required by date equal to the
assignment date). At the Curriculum record level, a basis date is set (or the global default
accepted – see section 9.1.1). Starting on the basis date, the calendar is divided into segments,
determined by the initial (or retraining) number and period (e.g., 30 Days, 2 Months, 1 Quarter,
etc.).
An additional parameter called Initial Assignment Threshold controls the ‘Grace Period’ when
using Calendar Basis. If the item is assigned via a curriculum during the initial threshold, the
item is due at the end of the current period in which it was assigned. If assigned after the initial
threshold, the item is due at the end of the next full period.

Calendar Basis Initial Period Example 1:


“Static” Required by Date

79
Calendar Basis Initial Period Example 2:
Curriculum Assigned Within Initial Threshold (Threshold = Entire Period)

Calendar Basis Initial Period Example 3:


Curriculum Assigned Outside of Initial Threshold

80
Notes

5.2.20 Item Substitute Relationships


Substitute relationships provide ‘for credit’ completion of Items based on the completion other
Items. When a learning event is recorded for an item which has a substitute, both items are
marked as complete for the User(s). The Force Credit option, when unchecked, results in
substitute learning events recorded for Users only if the substitute item is on the learning plan of
the User(s). This way, only the Users who have the substitute assigned to them receive credit.
It is important to note that substitutes do not work with requirements. For example, if a user
completes A and gets credit for B and B is part of an item pool, it does not count towards the
total items needed.
If using substitute relationships between Items, it is recommended that a ‘substitute’ or
‘collateral credit’ Completion Status (Section Error: Reference source not found) is created for
every Item Type. This allows the proper documentation in User’s Learning History of
completion of an alternate Item which grants credit for another. (E.g., User completes Item A,
which results in a for credit completion of Item B. The for credit status associated with Item B
refers to ‘Credit by Alternate Course Completion.’)
Also, setting the Effective Date on an Item Substitute relationship allows for granting
‘retroactive’ credit for completion of an item. (E.g., User completes and Item A in Oct 2005.
Admin adds Item A as substitute for Item B today with Effective Date of Sept 30, 2005. User
automatically receives credit for Item B because he completed it after the Effective Date).
Notes

81
5.2.21 Item Prerequisite Relationships
Prerequisite relationships between items prevent User action until all prerequisite items are
completed successfully. Users cannot launch online content or register in Scheduled Offerings
of items for which they have not completed the prerequisite items. There is one exception to
this rule, configured as a global User Setting (section 9.2.15) which allows Users to register in
Scheduled Offerings of items with prerequisites if they are also registered in an offering of the
prerequisite and it occurs before the subsequent offering.
And/Or Relationships Capability
Admins can create groups of prerequisite items. A user must complete all items within a
group to complete the prerequisites for the item. There is an OR relationship between
groups. Customers can provide groups of prerequisites for users to complete and thereby
provide different paths and options for completing the prerequisite learning objectives.
Curriculum as Prerequisite
Admins can add curricula to prerequisite groups as a prerequisite to an item. A user must
have a curriculum status of ‘complete’ to be considered as having met the prerequisite.

Notes

5.2.22 Minimum Registration


Instructor led, and blended items may have a minimum (and maximum) registration set at the
Delivery Data Tab. These settings are inherited by new Scheduled Offerings created of the
item. Minimum registration has added functionality. Users can ‘request schedule’ if an item on
their learning plan or in their catalog has no Scheduled Offerings, or the available offerings do
not meet their needs. When the number of requests equals the minimum registration number,
an email (Item Scheduling Demand) is sent to the contact address listed on the item Design
Data tab. If the Users are registered in an offering, they are removed from the request list
automatically, and as others request an offering, the email may be triggered again when the
threshold is met. The Item Scheduling Demand APM must be running for this email to be
triggered. (See Section 11.15)

5.2.23 User Item Ratings


If you enable user ratings for an Item and the system records a learning event (for example, a
user completes an item, or a supervisor or administrator records a learning event), then the
system allows any users who completed that item to rate the item by placing a What Did You
Think pod on the home page (just above the Catalog search box). If users click Dismiss, then
the system removes the item from the pod, but still allows users to rate the item from the
Completed Work area. Users can rate or revise any rating for these items by accessing the
Completed Work area of the application. When other users find the rated item in a catalog
search or view the details for an item, the system shows the average of all user ratings for that
item. The system shows the simple average: sum of all ratings divided by the number of all
ratings.

82
5.2.24 Item Re-launch (Online Items)
This feature allows administrators to configure the number of attempts a user must pass an
item. After each failed attempt, the user will have another attempt at all the content within the
item up until the maximum number of attempts configured. Once the user reaches the
maximum number of attempts, the item will be locked, and an administrator is required to unlock
the item so that the user may have another attempt. If an administrator unlocks the item for the
user, the user will have one more attempt at the item.
The configuration for this feature is in the Online Content > Modify Settings of an item record –
check ‘Lock Item after failure’ and enter the number of attempts. This may only be used with
content that can record failure for the item upon failure of the content which is currently available
for SuccessFactors Learning Exams, Browser-based content, AICC and SCORM 1.2 content.

5.2.25 Item Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Custom columns allow administrators to collect and track information on items that may be
unique to an organization and are not captured elsewhere on the item record. Custom columns
are searchable criteria for admins and therefore add another useful dimension to item records.
Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing administrators to have
a more thorough localized experience. Custom Fields are not visible to users.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Item

Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description


Regulatory 10 Y Y/N

Notes

5.3 Scheduling
Instructor-led and blended items must be scheduled to enable registration features, notifications
and cost calculation of training or event delivery. Scheduled offerings may be made available
for User self-registration if the item and offering reside in a catalog assigned to the target
audience. Administrators may control the Scheduled Offering registration list, including enrolling
Users and changing any enrolment statuses.
The SuccessFactors scheduling assistant provide administrators with the ability to determine
which resources (instructors, locations, equipment) are available for the desired schedule date
in a calendar view. Instructors are checked for item authorization and the facility holiday and
work week profile. Once scheduled, the Admin may modify notifications associated with the
offering, update the scheduled segments, input contacts (other Users or instructors who should
receive emails when the offering duration changes or Users self-register), and adjust costs and
pricing.

83
A new notification (1608) for instructors is added in to system to inform them when they are
scheduled to teach a course. The notification can be triggered when creating an Offering and or
when editing the Offering.
Scheduled offerings sometimes represent training or meetings delivered virtually, using
SuccessFactors Learning VLS connector if available. Virtually delivered Scheduled Offerings
may not have a facility associated with them.
New in scheduling, the admin can display total segments attended for each enrolled user
(Registration Tab > Segments) and can record segment attendance and comments for enrolled
users (Scheduled Offering > Segments tab).

5.3.1 Schedule Offering ID


The schedule offering ID is an auto-generated sequential numeric ID. It cannot be manually
entered or modified once created.

5.3.2 Schedule Offering Status


Like other records, Scheduled Offering may be set to active or inactive. Inactivating Scheduled
Offerings hides them from User view and is typically used after an offering has been delivered
and closed. Closing a Scheduled Offering is used to process financial transactions (calculating
costs of delivery).

5.3.3 Schedule Offering Time Zone and Show in this Time Zone Setting
An important consideration to make is how Users and administrators view the time of Scheduled
Offering delivery. Both Users and Admin have a time zone preference setting which they may
be able to update. In these preferences is the ability to ‘always show Scheduled Offerings in
this time zone.’ This allows Users and Admin the option to convert the delivery time into the
preferred time zone. If they have not chosen this option, administrators creating the offerings
may choose to ‘show in this time zone,’ which forces the time zone of delivery to be used in
display. This setting is typically chosen for offerings being delivered at facilities (Users
especially may be traveling to the facility). For virtually delivered courses, the Users may prefer
to view the Scheduled Offering according to their time zone preference.
Notes
Identify the time zone configuration options to <Customer Name>
84
Notes

5.3.4 Approval Process ID/Approval Required


Like items, Scheduled Offerings may have approval processes associated with them. If an
approval process is referenced and the ‘approval required’ checkbox is enabled, Users will be
forced to submit a request for approval when attempting to self-register. Administrators and
Supervisors may always register Users without approval.

5.3.5 Withdraw Approval Process ID/Withdraw Approval Required


Scheduled Offerings may be configured to require an approval process if a user wishes to
withdraw from the offering. If a withdraw approval process is referenced and the ‘withdraw
approval required’ checkbox is enabled, Users will be forced to submit a request for approval
when attempting to withdraw. Administrators and Supervisors using the bulk tool only (My
Employees>Supervisor Links>Withdraw Employees) may withdraw Users without approval.

5.3.6 Registration/Withdraw Cut-Off Date


If self-registration is enabled, the Admin may choose to determine a registration and withdraw
cut-off date, which prohibits Users from self-registering or withdrawing from the Scheduled
Offering after the specified date(s) and time(s). Administrators may always register and
withdraw Users after the date and time, with a system warning.

5.3.7 Minimum and Maximum Registrations


At the offering level, minimum registration has no effects and is referential and can be used to
search for scheduled offering that do not have the minimum enrollment met. Maximum
registration prevents Users from self-registering with a status of ‘enrolled’ if the maximum has
been met. Users have the option of registering with a status of ‘waitlist’ and are added to the
roster as such. If set at the offering level, auto-fill registration automatically moves Users from
the waitlist into the next available seat if another User withdraws. Administrators may manually
change any User’s registration status at any time.

5.3.8 Registration Statuses


Users registered in Scheduled Offerings may have one of the default registration statuses
(ENROLL, WAITLIST, PENDING, CANCELLED) or any additional registration statuses created
as a reference. E.g., if a User cancels because of a mission related reason, the registration
status may be changed to CANCEL-MISSION. This allows administrators to report upon all the
mission related cancellations. All new registration statuses must be associated with a
registration type, which determines the type of action the status triggers (E.g., CANCEL-
MISSION is a Cancel type, which means the user is un-enrolled from the offering if this status is
chosen.)
Note: Registration Status Descriptions can be localized.
Registration Status ID Description
(30 Char) (40Char) Registration Type

CANCEL-MISSION Mission related cancellation Cancelled

85
Registration Status ID Description
(30 Char) (40Char) Registration Type

Notes

5.3.9 Self-Registration
Enabling self-registration allows Users to register for Scheduled Offerings, provided those
offerings are in catalogs assigned to the target Users. Careful consideration of catalog creation
allows administrators to restrict the Users who may register in offerings of items. Scheduled
offerings cannot reside in catalogs in which the item does not reside. Users cannot self-register
in offerings if the registration max has been met (they will have the option to waitlist), or if the
registration cut-off date and time has passed.

5.3.10 Notifications
Administrators may modify the email notifications associated with Scheduled Offerings at the
Global level (see section 13.1), the Item level, and the Scheduled Offering level. Email
notifications triggered by Scheduled Offering actions include registration, User enrollment status
change, Scheduled Offering segment change and offering cancellation. Administrators may
attach a file to the emails that are delivered by the system.

Notes

86
5.3.11 Slots
Organization Slots
Administrators may reserve slots for Users within specific organizations. If self-registration is
enabled, Users in the exact organization occupy the slot instead of the rest of the available
seats. Sometimes administrators use slots to preserve an even distribution of Users in a
Scheduled Offering. As a group of slots is associated with only one organization, it is
important to understand how the organization structure may limit the use of this feature. For
example, if the organization structure is deep, organizations may contain a relatively small
number of Users and therefore slots must be created for each unique organization targeted.
(Administrators cannot associate ‘rolled up’ organizations, or more than one organization with
a group of slots). As of 1605, Use Order Ticket action is not displayed if user’s organization
has an available slot. Upon registration, user is informed their organization has a reserved
seat, slot ID is automatically used for payment.
User Group Slots
Many times, seats in a scheduled offering need to be reserved for a group of users which may
not all belong into the same organization. This feature allows for the creation and automated
maintenance of user groups using assignment profile attributes and using the Group record to
reserve slots in scheduled offerings as is previously done with Organizations. This allows for
seat reservation for a wider range of users who may not all report within the same
organizational hierarchy and gives greater flexibility for our customers to group users together
across the organization
Groups can now be used to reserve scheduled offering slots. Users that are part of that group
can automatically register under the available slot seats.

Notes

5.3.12 Contacts (Others)


When Users self-register in Scheduled Offerings, all Users and instructors listed on the
Contacts Tab receive the registration notification. Contacts also receive notification when the
Scheduled Offering segments change. Administrators registering Users in Scheduled Offering
have the option to notify the contacts.
87
5.3.13 Cancelling a Schedule Offering
Scheduled offerings that have not yet occurred may be cancelled by the Admin. This triggers
an assistant and allows the Admin to move enrolled and waitlisted Users to the item request list
(so they may be re-enrolled in another offering of the item) and capture any costs incurred.
Notifications are sent to Users and the offering may be inactivated to prevent Users from self-
registering.
Notes

5.3.14 Closing a Scheduled Offering


Unlike offering cancellation, closing a Scheduled Offering may only occur after the offering has
been delivered. This process is solely to finalize costs associated with the Scheduled Offering
(if associated resources and item has costs) and charges the appropriate account code. If
commerce features are not in use, administrators need not close any Scheduled Offerings.
Closing a scheduled offering also prevents any additional modifications to the roster.
Notes

5.3.15 Scheduled Offering Registration Form


Administrators can enable a registration form for a scheduled offering to collect various data
during the registration process (from employee, manager, or admin), for example personal
travel requirements such as hotel needed. This is done by assigning custom columns to the
registration form after creating a scheduled offering. This data can later be accessed, exported
and/or printed by the admin.
Notes

5.3.16 Documents
Administrators can associate documents to scheduled offerings. This allows customers to post
documents such as agendas, specific offering related material, and any special announcements
at the scheduled offering level rather than only at the item level.
Notes

5.3.17 Registration Form Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Registration Form custom columns can be created to collect additional information during the
registration process. Once created and made available, custom columns can be individually
associated to the registration form for each scheduling offering record. Custom field labels and
reference descriptions can be translated allowing administrators to have a more thorough
localized experience.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Registration Form

88
Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description
Hotel Required 10 Y Y/N

Notes

5.3.18 Scheduled Offering Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Custom columns allow administrators to collect and track information on scheduled offerings
that may be unique to an organization and are not captured elsewhere on the scheduled
offering record. Custom columns are searchable criteria and therefore add another useful
dimension to scheduled offering records. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be
translated allowing administrators to have a more thorough localized experience.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Scheduled Offering

Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description


Regulatory 10 Y Y/N

Notes

5.3.19 Schedule Blocks


Schedule blocks are non-item Scheduled Offerings. They are intended to block resources from
use in other Scheduled Offerings. When creating a schedule block, administrators must choose
from a list of schedule block ID’s (reference values). Below are schedule block ID’s chosen by
<Customer Name>:
References > Learning > Schedule Blocks

Schedule Block ID Description


(30 Char) (100 char)
CONF Conference
MTG Meeting
OFSM Off-site Meeting
VAC Vacation

89
5.3.20 Cancellation Reasons
An admin may choose to require these when a user withdraws or is cancelled from an offering
(when enabled in 9.2.13). Note: This Reference is not included in the Reference Import
template and must be configured manually.
References > Learning > Cancellation Reason

Schedule Block ID Description


(30 Char) (100 char)
BUDGET Funds are no longer available in budget
CONFLICT Schedule Conflict
INCORRECT COURSE Incorrect Course
PERSONAL Personal Reason

5.4 Instructor
Instructors are unique entities in that they represent people, but do not have login accounts in
the LMS but can be related to existing User account in the system. The relationship between an
instructor and a user can be created at either the instructor or the user record. The User
connector will inactivate related Instructors if the User is being inactivated. This relationship
also allows the Instructor’s User account to receive a requested Approval for a Learning Event
when eSignatures are enabled.
When associated with Scheduled Offerings, instructors receive email notifications and may
receive notifications when the roster or Scheduled Offering segments change. Instructors often
represent training vendors, as the organization may not track the individual delivering training
but wish to notify the vendor when changes are made.
The ‘Biography’ field can be populated to allow additional information about the instructor to be
displayed to users in the Instructor tile on the Curriculum Cover Page.
To help administrators find instructors for Scheduled Offerings of items, instructors may be
authorized to teach those items. The scheduling module in SuccessFactors warns
administrators who attempt to schedule unauthorized instructors. Instructors may also be
identified as proctors for online exams and administrators may generate proctor codes which
unlock exams for Users on specified calendar days. Below are example instructors and
discussion on how instructor records will be created by <Customer Name>.
Learning > Instructors

90
Example
First Name Last Name
Instructor ID Email Address Role ID
(50 Char) (50 Char)
(30 Char)

938475 jstuart@corphq.co DEFAULT


Jennifer Stuart
(Employee ID) m INSTRUCTOR

Notes
If <Customer Name> is using VLS, include the VLS information in this section.
Will user records be associated with instructor records?

5.4.1 Instructor View


Instructors have a dedicated view to help them manage their courses by leveraging existing
user authentication eliminating the need for administrator-level access. The instructor record
must be associated to the user record which can be done on either the instructor record or the
user record. The instructor view is also available on the iPad.
This view enables the Instructors to:

 View their scheduled offerings


 View offering details
 View students who have registered for the offerings
 Access the public profile of registered students (1608)
 Communicate with students via email
 Launch virtual sessions
 View segment details
 Record attendance via QR codes
 Record attendance manually
 Initiate (view and select users) evaluations prior to/after completion (1611)
 Record Learning for AdhocClasses (i.e. no Scheduled Offering record) (b1602)
 Record Learning with e-Signature (1608)
 Add Walk-ins to the list of class participants (b1602)
 Print Rosters (1608)
 View and update their VLS account information (1611)
 Access documents linked to the scheduled offering (1608)

91
5.4.2 Instructor Custom Columns (Custom Fields)
Custom columns allow administrators to collect and track information on instructors that may be
unique to an organization and are not captured elsewhere on the instructor record. Custom
columns are searchable criteria and therefore add another useful dimension to instructor
records. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing
administrators to have a more thorough localized experience.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Instructor

Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description


MS Office SMI 10 Y Y/N

Notes

92
5.5 Task Checklist
5.5.1 Tasks
As an instructional designer, you can create tasks to support the instructional goals that you
have developed. These tasks serve as the basis for creating instructional objectives
(Content>Objectives) and instructional materials. Tasks can support the instructional design
methodology of your company. After creating a task, you can associate it with items,
competencies, job positions, job locations, and documents.

5.5.2 OJT Usage


In addition, you can associate Tasks with Items allowing the ability to create Checklists enabling
customers to build out lists of specific tasks that can be assigned through Items. The
administrator can configure a task checklist to require a minimum number of successfully
completed tasks to record a completion for the item. They can also enable/disable Notes fields
as well as enter task checklist durations. When the times are entered for tasks, the total time is
calculated at the bottom. This total time can be overridden or recorded without task level times.
When the learning event is recorded the total time will be recorded as the Item Total Hours and
Contact Hours.

5.5.3 Authorized Observers


Admins can limit the observers users can choose from when requesting observation of their
Task Checklist completion. The list of authorized observers is pulled from the Authorized
Instructors designated on the Item record. This is enabled with the Observers must be
Authorized Instructors option.

93
5.5.4 Observer – Self Assigned
The assignee can designate one or more observers to watch them complete the assigned list.
The observers complete out the Checklist on behalf of the assignee then marks the Item itself
complete, either successfully or not-successfully. This functionality is suited for On the Job
Training, Procedural Training, Specific repeatable processes within structured environments or
Processes that need tracking and can be broken down into specific steps. To enable the Task
Checklist functionality, the Item should be setup as Item Classification Other with the required
Tasks associated. In the Task Settings the associated Completion Status can be associated.
Task Checklists can also be launched on iPad.
Note: This functionality is particularly useful for Life Science implementations to document OJT
or observation relative to an operating procedure.

5.5.5 Observer – Admin Assigned (b1608)


A new Assign Task Observers wizard provides Learning Administrators a way to assign task
observers to users with bulk assignment capability to support a centralized observer assignment
model.

A new setting has been introduced at the Item Record level to enable or disable the ability for
Users to Request Observation. When this setting is disabled only the Administrators can Assign
Observers and the Users can only view observers.

94
Related Workflows:

 Admin:
o Assign Task Observer (domain restricted by user and/or item)

Notes

95
5.6 Jam and Jam Groups (Integration in conjunction with BizX
Platform)
With Jam, Users can search both the LMS course catalog and Jam group content from the LMS
Catalog Search page. Results are returned in one page.
With the Premier Edition of Jam, Jam groups can be created from within Item records. This
creates an association to the Item and allows for auto-invitations based on assignment of the
item, enrollment in an offering of the item, and recording a learning event for the item. The
auto-invitations include a customized email message. Once users accept the invitation, they
can access the groups from the Learning Plan, Item Details, and Jam. This allows a blended
approach to learning – combining formal and informal learning. This only works with integrated
environments. Admins will not see the Jam Groups on item records if logged in natively.
Admin Workflows:

 Add/Edit Program Jam Groups


 Edit Item Groups
 Edit Jam Groups Notification Automatic Process
 View Item Groups
User Workflows:

 Access Jam
Jam Groups at Item Level

96
Create a New Jam Group within a Learning Item

Notes

5.7 Evaluations (1708)


Three levels of evaluation are captured in the LMS: 1) User Satisfaction, 2) Mastery of Content,
and 3) Application of Learning. Surveys can be created for User Satisfaction, and the
Application of Learning to evaluate the success of a given learning activity. Question types for
surveys include Multiple Choice (checkbox), Rating Scale (using configured rating scales),
Single Choice (radio button) and Open Ended.
Surveys may be configured to be anonymous and can be required for Item completion (the
Learning Event which triggers survey assignment is not finalized until the survey is completed
by the user). Notifications are configurable at the survey level and support attachments.
97
One Item Evaluation: User Satisfaction (Level 1) and one Follow-up: Application of Learning
(Level 3) Evaluation may be associated with an item. Learning Evaluation: Mastery of Content
(Level 2) is addressed using SuccessFactors Exams. If an exam is associated as online
content (Online settings tab of the item) it may be flagged as a Pre-test or Post-test. This
enables user performance on pre- and post-evaluations to be compared in a SuccessFactors
report (Level 2 Evaluation Report).
Surveys must be associated with one of two levels: Item Evaluation: User Satisfaction (Level 1)
or Follow-up Evaluation: Application of Learning (Level 3). Level 1 Surveys are automatically
assigned to users when a learning event is recorded for the item (and the completion status is
configured to allow the use of the user satisfaction survey). Level 3 surveys are automatically
assigned to users and/or their supervisors after a pre-determined amount of time has passed
since the learning event was recorded for the item (and the completion status is configured to
allow the use of the application of learning survey). After Questionnaire Surveys are created,
they are associated with Items on the Evaluations tab. An automatic process (see page 207)
must run to assign the follow-up surveys and notify the users and/or supervisors.
Questionnaires surveys can be translated for each language pack enabled in the system. Each
text element of a survey that is displayed to the end user can have a translation entered for the
supported languages. Note: Partial translations are not supported and if a locale is used for
any field translation within the survey, then all fields must have translation values entered for the
locale. This will insure consistent display of the survey across all languages.
From b1411, multi-instructor surveys are supported. Administrators can create questions about
instructors on a single page. At run time, the system presents the questions to users for each
instructor.
From 1708, On the Evaluations tab of an Item Exams can be specified as Pre-test and/or Post-
test. A Learning Evaluation report aggregates the scores of the pre-test and post-test.
Use the table below to document naming conventions for new surveys:
Learning > Questionnaire Surveys

Survey ID Survey Description


Days to
Name (300 Level Anon?
(30 Char) Complete (2000 Char)
Char)
HR_CourseEva HR Course 1 Y 7
2Char Dept_SurveyTitle
l Evaluation
North 3 N/A 6 months
America IT 2CharRegional Office ID-
NA-IT-SEC-
Security 3Char DeptID-3Char Subject-
L3Survey
Level 3 SurveyTitle
Survey

98
Notes

5.7.1 Rating Scales for Questionnaire Surveys


The Rating Scale type questions added to questionnaire surveys utilizes ratings scales
configured in the LMS. Discuss the use of rating scales in questionnaires. If needed, use the
table below to capture rating scales that need to be configured for use in questionnaire surveys.
References > System Admin > Rating Scales

Rating Scale ID
Description
Rating

Rating Rating Label


1 Very dissatisfied
2 Dissatisfied
3 Somewhat dissatisfied
4 Relatively satisfied
5 Satisfied
6 Very satisfied

(Add more rows for additional ratings)


Reporting 3
Groups

Range Reporting Group Label


0-1.99 Very dissatisfied
2-4 Moderately dis/satisfied
4.01-6 Very satisfied

(Add/remove rows according to the number of ranges selected)

(Add more tables for additional rating scales)

99
Notes

5.8 Accomplishments (1705)


Learning Accomplishments is a way for users to set target learning goals against topics that
interest them and be able to track their training over time against those goals. Prior to this, the
user really had no insight into which areas they were naturally focused on training in or a
summary of how much training they were accomplishing over time. Learning accomplishments
will not only give the user that insight but will allow them to set their own pace of learning to
motivate them to stick to their training goals. This goes well beyond the static learning history
view into what they’ve accomplished and allows the user to jump right into finding more relevant
training in an area they are interested in learning more about.
Workflows:
Access Learning Accomplishments
Prerequisite:
learningAccomplishmentEnabled=true

5.8.1 Select the subject areas they want to track

100
5.8.2 Select the number of courses they want to track

5.8.3 Total Learning per month

101
5.8.4 Time spent by topic

102
5.9 Curricula
Curricula have several purposes in delivering and tracking training in SuccessFactors Learning.
Used as a compliance tool, administrators can track completion of a series of items and
requirements (electives) as a whole. Standard reports are available that detail all the Users who
are assigned a Curriculum, its completion status, and the completion status of all the items and
requirements within. The most efficient assignment methods (assignment profiles and Job
Code/Curricula alignment) require the use of Curricula. Also, the use of retraining periods (see
Period Based Assignments) and calendar basis requires items to be contained in a Curriculum.
Curricula may contain items, requirements and sub-Curricula. Depending upon the Curricula
settings, different entities within the Curriculum must be complete for the Curriculum to be
complete for a User. Curricula may also be published to catalogs which makes them available
for User’s to self-assign. Unlike self-assigned free-floating items, items within a self-assigned
Curriculum maintain the assignment type (required, optional, etc.) specified in the Curriculum
record.
Example of Curricula (Naming convention)

Curriculum ID Title Description


(30 char) (50 Char) (2000 char)
ALL = All Domains
NHO = NHO curriculum
ALL_NHO_ALL_Y200 New Hire Orientation for All
ALL = Audience
9 Employees
Y2009 = Year

Notes

5.9.1 Curriculum Status


A status of “Complete” is issued to the Curriculum when any of the following occur:
 All effective, required items and requirements are complete and all sub-Curricula are
complete.

 The effective date of all required items and requirements is in the future.

 Some of the required items and requirements are complete and the remaining required
items and requirements have an effective date in the future.
A status of “Incomplete” is in effect when any of the following occur:

103
 A new Curriculum is assigned to Users and the effective date for any required items or
requirements is in the past.

 Any effective, required item or requirement has not been completed.

 A completed item or requirement has a retraining period and the required by date is in
the past.

 The Curriculum is modified with a new or revised item and the effective date is in the
past.
There are three date settings associated with items when used in Curricula: initial period,
retraining period and effective date. The initial and retraining period set at the item record level
is inherited when the item is added to a Curriculum and may be modified per Curriculum. This
will not change the default at the item level. Effective date is applied only to required items
within the Curriculum, and essentially determines ‘when’ the item is required for Curriculum
completion. For example, in an existing Curriculum that is already assigned to Users and
potentially already complete by some, administrators may want to add a new item to the
Curriculum but set the effective date to the future so Users have time to complete this item and
remain compliant until that date. After the item becomes effective, it is required for Curriculum
completion.
If the “Ignore Previous Completions” is enabled for an Item in a Curriculum the system will
ignore item completions that are older than the specified number of days. This functionality can
be used similarly to Retraining but the related Item will be handled as a new Item assignment
rather than calculate a retraining date.
The chart below illustrates item date settings in relation to item ‘overdue status’ and Curriculum
completion status.

104
It is possible to track compliance details with regards to the completion of required Items and
Curricula. Admins can report whether employees were compliant (required training was
completed) and if the training was completed on time. When a learning event is recorded for
required Items, data will be saved with the event that identifies the calculated values needed for
enhanced compliance reporting. The new values saved are: Required Date, Assignment Type,
Curriculum ID, and Curriculum Assign Date.
A priority level can be assigned at the curriculum level. This helps end users prioritize their
curricula assignments. Levels are numeric and globally configured up to ‘10’ in Global Variables
(9.1.1). Priority levels are assigned in the Summary area of a curriculum record.
The administrator can use the deactivation wizard to resolve relationships while deactivating
curricula. The wizard looks at the existing relationships of the curriculum and returns with
options to manage the relationships. For example, if a curriculum is assigned to job codes, the
wizard returns an option to remove the curriculum from existing job codes. In most cases, you
should remove the relationships completely from a curriculum.

105
Notes

5.9.2 HTML Curriculum Descriptions


HTML formatting can be added to curriculum descriptions to be displayed to users. This allows
admins to format the descriptions to make them more visually appealing and organized. HTML
descriptions are visible on the Curriculum Details page and Catalog Search Results. It displays
as plain text elsewhere such as in reports.
The following HTML formatting is supported:

 Bold
 Italics
 Underline
 Bulleted List
 Numbered List
 Font Color
 Font Background Color
 Links
Note: HTML Descriptions is enabled by the setting in the LMS_ADMIN file (setting applies to
both Item and Curriculum).

106
Notes

5.9.3 Curriculum Cover Page


Administrators can create custom HTML enabled landing pages for curricula which provide
admins the tools they need to deliver tailored information about a curriculum to end users. A
source code view provides added design flexibility. The cover pages can also be created in
different languages for international audiences.
Admins can access the cover page on the Curriculum record. They can choose one of three
available layouts and make edits to each content area of the layout. A Preview button is also
available to view the edits. Once changes are saved the admin can activate the cover page and
make it visible to end users.
The cover page can include new sidebar content tiles for ‘Current Instructors’ and ‘Upcoming
Courses’.

 Instructor tile: Displays a list of the primary instructors who are currently scheduled to
teach a future offering of the items within the curriculum. If the instructor record is linked
to a related user in Learning, the tile will also display the photo and job title associated to
the user. Clicking on an instructor’s name will display additional information such as the
Instructor Biography (new field on Instructor record) and a list of other items the
instructor is scheduled to teach.
 Scheduled Offering tile: Dynamically displays the first few offerings of items in the
curriculum that have a future start date, are in the user’s catalog, and those that the user
is not already enrolled. The results will sort first by offerings in the user's region. The
user can page through up to 20 offerings (cannot be changed). Clicking on an offering
will open the Offering Details.

107
Curriculum cover pages are supported only with the Recommended User Interface Display
feature enabled.

Notes

5.9.4 Curriculum Type


Curriculum Type is a way of categorizing Curricula and is a searchable criterion for
administrators. Below is a list of Curriculum types chosen by <Customer Name>.
108
References > Learning > Curriculum Type

Curriculum Type ID Description


(30 char) (40 Char)
HEALTH Health and Safety
HR Human Resources
PDEV Personal Development
SAFTY Safety

Notes

5.9.5 Curriculum Force Incomplete


Used only with Curricula in conjunction with ‘not for credit’ completion statuses, force incomplete
sets the User’s Curriculum Status based on the last recorded Learning Event for the Item.
Example: User completes Curriculum once, and later an Item failure is recorded. The
Curriculum becomes incomplete based upon that recorded failure. If another ‘for credit’
Learning Event is recorded, the Curriculum becomes complete again.
Example of the use of Force Incomplete:
A User is ‘released to task’ (employee is granted access to perform a task because of
successful Curriculum completion). If the User does not perform the task to expectations,
specifications, etc., an Admin may record a Not-For-Credit Learning Event (No Longer Able to
Perform Task) for the User. When Force Incomplete is enabled, the User’s Curriculum
becomes incomplete regardless of the Next Action Date for the Item.
Notes

5.9.6 Curriculum Substitute Force Incomplete (b1602)


Prior to Q1 2016, substitutes can grant credit for an item in a curriculum. If the curriculum is set
to Force Incomplete, then the most recent completion is the status applied when calculating
curriculum completion. When disabled, the most recent “for credit” status is applied. The
enhancement in the Q1 2016 release provides a configuration on the substitute
(Item>Substitute tab) that will record a not-for-credit learning event for the Item when the
substitute is failed under certain conditions. The curriculum will look at the most recent learning
event for the Item (which may be recorded when a substitute is failed) when Force Incomplete is
enabled.

109
Notes

5.9.7 Item Sequence / Display Order


Sequencing is only used in conjunction with the Curriculum Scheduling admin tool. It is not the
order in which Users must complete the items within a Curriculum. It provides the User Display
Order and scheduling tool order in which new Scheduled Offerings of the items within the
Curriculum are scheduled.
Notes

5.9.8 Curriculum Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Custom columns allow SuccessFactors administrators to capture additional information about
organization records. Use the table below to list curriculum custom columns. Column numbers
are usually listed in increments of 100 to allow for future custom columns within the range.
Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing administrators to have
a more thorough localized experience.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Curriculum

Ref. ID Value or Field


Label Col # Referenced
Description
HQ Requirements 10 N Headquarters Curriculum

Notes

110
5.10 Requirements
Requirements are entities that extend the use of Curricula and items by offering Users choices
of which training to complete to satisfy the Curricula. Users are required to complete a specified
number of items and/or hours (of a certain type) to complete a requirement. The choices may
be in the form of an item pool or from all available items in the Users’ catalog or learning plan.
Requirements, like items, may have initial and retraining periods which determine overdue
status, and effective dates which determine when the requirement is required for Curriculum
completion. If requirements are added to a Curriculum and made effective, all must be
complete for a User to achieve Curriculum completion. However, if the requirements are
grouped, an ‘OR’ relationship is created. Any of the requirements completed within a group
satisfies the group, and if there are no items or sub-Curricula, the Curriculum is complete.
There are three types of requirements:
 Number of hours (of a specified hour type)
 Number of hours (of a specified hour type) from an item pool
 Number of items from an item pool
Requirements with item pools make item choices available to Users, however, the items must
reside in catalogs assigned to the User for the User to launch online content or register for
Scheduled Offerings of those items (the items in the pool do not display on the To-Do list until
the user navigates to the curriculum requirement and manually selects the item.).

5.11 Recommended Items


As an administrator, you can enable item or program recommendations. Once enabled you can
add one or more items or programs to the Recommended tab of an assignment profile when
you want to recommend those items or programs to the users in the assignment profile. An
item/program appears in the user's catalog or on the user's home page if the item is:
 In a catalog that is assigned to the user.
111
 Not already on the user's To-do list.
 Not in the user's learning history (completed work).
If a user dismisses an administrator-recommended item/program, then that item/program does
not appear on the user's home page as a recommended item/program, even if an administrator
adds it as a recommended item to a different assignment profile which that the user is also
included in.
The functionality is designed to allow customers to market to their customers, suggest courses
they may be interested in, and raise awareness for new content.
Notes

5.12 Peer Recommendations


Users can recommend any learning to their peers. Items including OCN, Curricula, and
Programs (must be active and in the recipient user’s catalog) can be recommended with a
personal note. QuickGuides and External Links may also be recommended to peers. They
appear on the Recommended tile on the user’s learning home page. Peer recommendations
appear on the Recommended tile even if they are already on their learning plan.

Recommendations can be made from several browser-based application areas:


 Home page tiles
 Catalog
 Item details page
 My Employees learning plans
The user must have the ‘Recommend to Peer’ workflow. Any active user with first and/or last
name may be selected unless restricted based on organization in the SEARCH configuration file
(restrictUserPeerSearchByOrg=true). Peer recommendations are not allowed as an admin or
delegate via proxy.
An email notification can be sent out to recipients of a peer recommendation by scheduling the
Recommendations Newsletter APM.
112
Notes

5.13 Collections (b1608)


Learning > Collections
A collection is a group of Web sites that you want to recommend to users. This feature enables
curating, grouping and sharing external content. Users create a collection on a topic and add
web links to the collection. It can then be recommended to users via an assignment profile.
Collections are displayed to users on the Recommendations Tile on the learning homepage.
 Users View Recommended Collections
 Admins Recommend Collections to Users
 Admins Create Collection of External Links
 Users Create/Edit Collection of Links
 New Collection landing page for Users
 Users can Recommend to Peers
 Users can Publish Collection to a Catalog
 Users can Bookmark Collections
 Track User Views of a Collection
 Admins can delete User created Collections
 Add Items and QuickGuides from catalog to Collections
 Detailed tracking of Entry Views available
 User Ratings of Collections
 Statistics Reports on Collections

113
Related Workflows:

 Admin:
o Add Collection
o Edit Collection
o Search Collection
o View Collection
o Edit Assignment Profile Recommended Collections
o View Assignment Profile Recommended Collections
 User:
o Author Collection
 Pre-requisite workflows (to create links, that then can be added to collections)
o Search External Links
o Add External Links
o Edit External Links

Notes

5.14 Programs
Learning Programs is a simple and intuitive method of delivering learning that spans over an
extended period and is comprised of various types of learning activities. Programs enables you
to maximize the end user’s learning experience by combining a variety of learning elements and
activities and structuring them in the manner and order that you intend them to be consumed.

114
Programs can be used to deliver academic-style learning, where the pace of learning is dictated
by the program schedule and where live sessions/collaboration is most common. Programs can
also be used to deliver self-paced learning, where users are in control of their progress toward
completing the program’s activities.
Programs are meant for simple course delivery and they control how the user consumes what is
contained within them; in most cases, individual item/SO settings (such as pre-requisites) will be
ignored. For anything compliance-related with rules about history, requirements rules (pool,
credit hours), etc., curricula should be used.
Note: The Recommended User Interface Display must be enabled.
As of 1605, Programs the following enhancements are being introduced to Programs:
 Edit learning event history
 Grading options support
 Associate competencies with Programs
As of 1611, Programs can be included into Recommendations
Learning > Programs

115
Notes

5.14.1 Program Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Custom columns allow administrators to collect and track information additional information on
programs. Custom columns are searchable criteria and therefore add another useful dimension
to program records. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing
administrators to have a more thorough localized experience.
System Admin > Custom Columns > Program

116
Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description
Reviewed By 10 N Text field

Notes

5.15 QuickGuides
A QuickGuide is a collection of steps (up to 30 steps) made up of images and step instructions.
They are user created job aids that can be published to learning catalogs the author has access
to and those that are configured to accept user authored content. Users must be granted the
permission to author QuickGuides.
Authors can create a description which is searchable in the catalog and displayed when
launching the guide. Users can bookmark QuickGuides from search results or a launched guide
making them more easily accessible from the Bookmarks tile on the landing page. QuickGuides
can also be rated by users using the same star rating as Items. The rating is easily accessed
from a launched QuickGuide on a PC or iPhone. A QuickGuide’s average rating is visible to
users in catalog search results and to administrators in the Catalog snapshot, QuickGuide tab.
Admins can view the amount of storage used by QuickGuides and how many QuickGuides have
been created (System Admin>Environment). QuickGuide capacity is limited to 10 Gigabytes.
Future space will be allocated through additional licensing.
In 1711, when users are deleted from SAP SuccessFactors Learning, their QuickGuides remain
in the system so that other users can still learn from the QuickGuides, but the users' personal
information is removed: they no longer appear as the author of the QuickGuide.

117
Notes

5.16 External Links (GA b1602)


Learning > External Links
External Links allows administrators to add and recommend external links/articles/videos to
employees which then can be tracked in the system. Admins can enter the link URL to add a
new Link. The Title, Description, and thumbnail image are prepopulated if available and
accessible via the public internet without any access or security restriction. The thumbnail
images are loaded only if they have a HTTPS URL for security reasons. The admin can also
upload a custom thumbnail image.
Admins can then recommend the links to users who can receive notifications as well as see the
links on the Recommended tile on the Learning home page. Once the user views the link, the
user will not see it on the Recommended tile. The user also can bookmark External Links from
the Recommended tile. The admin has an option to include personalized smartlinks in the email
that will redirect to the External Link without an explicit login to LMS and record the user viewing
the link on LMS. By default, a Direct Link is included in the email.
The ‘Send Reminder’ option in the wizard is to be used to send reminders if needed. It pre-
populates with the users who have not yet viewed the link.
The email notification that includes the External Links recommendations is triggered by the
Recommendations Newsletter APM. When the Recommendations newsletter is being used, up

118
to 4 External Links recommended to the user but not yet viewed are randomly selected and
included in the email.

Notes

5.17 Open Content Network


Learning > Content Network
The Open Content Network (OCN) is a feature which allows organizations to offer employees
the ability to easily access fresh, meaningful content at a reduced cost through Massive Online
Open Courses (MOOCs).  Via SuccessFactors Open Content Network partners, the partners’
catalogs can be enabled in the LMS and made available in catalogs, as part of Programs or
Curricula, as well as directly assigned to users by admins or supervisors.

5.17.1 Open Content Network Partners


 lynda.com
 Coursera (on Demand and Live Sessions)
119
 Udacity
 Open Sesame
 OpenHPI
 Harvard Manage Mentor
 edX

5.17.2 OCN Configuration File


System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > OPEN CONTENT NETWORK
After setting up user access agreements with one or more of the relevant content providers, the
system admin will configure the OCN properties to enable the default item configurations for
each provider that will be applied on import. The admin schedules and runs the OCN Content
Synchronization APM (see section Error: Reference source not found) to initiate the import of
the content libraries into the LMS.

The admin can then search across the providers’ library of courses and select the specific
courses they want to import under the Content Network submenu. These courses are imported
as items using the system default item classification of ‘EXTERNAL-COURSE’. Admin then
searches for the courses as items in the environment and adds them to catalogs, assignment
profiles, programs or curricula as required.

5.17.3 OCN Framework for adding new OCN Providers


Customers can now configure additional Open Content Network Providers in addition to the
providers supported by the product. The new provider can be added, enabled and configured in
the OCN configuration page. A custom logo can be added for the provider and partner specific
configurations can then be added against that provider ID.

Content providers that our customers use can now build their own integration with the SAP
SuccessFactors Open Content Network framework through our Partners Edge program. Once
their integration is certified, they can offer it to any of our Learning customers to streamline the
content integration process for both the admin and the user.

The provider will need to first establish a partnership with SAP through our Partner Edge
program to utilize the OCN API’s and must follow the Integration Guide for Open Content
Network Partners.

120
121
OCN courses appear to users in the main catalog search tab. Providers appear as a filter
choice under the Source filter.

122
Notes to Consider for OCN:

• The content resides at the content provider site. The LMS links the user to that course at
the provider’s site.
• When the user launches an OCN course, they are taken to that provider’s site to interact
with the course outside of the LMS.
• Lynda.com offers AICC course tracking, so SF can utilize session SSO for the user
through BizX, and bookmarking and item completion can be recorded automatically.
• For Coursera, Udacity, and OpenHPI, the user will need to log in first at the partner site
before accessing the course.
• All commerce functionality is handled outside the application for OCN courses. All
courses are set to “No Charge” upon import.
• LinkedIn Learning (formerly Lynda.com) has an updated platform. Since 1802, the LMS
will allow new implementations to use the OCN framework course push process, rather
than the legacy Lynda.com course synch.
*Please Note: Users will not see action buttons if a price and chargeback methods other than
“No Charge” are set on OCN courses

123
Notes

124
5.18 Course Home
System Configuration > LMS_ADMIN
In Q4 2017, we are introducing Course Home for preview environments. We are redesigning the
learner experience for launching courses, checking progress in courses, and completing
courses. Course Home is a multi-release project, and this is the first release. This is complete
redesign how a user launches and completes an online course. EnableCoursehomeflag is set to
true under Admin->System admin->Configurations->System configuration->LMS Admin.
In Q1 2018, Instructor-Led courses, can also utilize Course Home. In Q2 2018, Assessments
and the registration process were included in the new Course Home feature. In Q3 2018, course
home is available for use in Production.
The main components are Thumbnail, Course ID, Course Title, Course metadata: hours, target
audience, version, Rating and Primary Action.
Limitations:

• Item review will be launched in old UI

• Content settings with: window.top header. (will be supported in upcoming releases)

• Slots are not supported

• Shipping information

• Request Schedule.

• E-signature with approval process is not supported.

Quick Reminders:

 PQE is not supported in course home. Courses with PQE will be redirected to the old
UI

 External user flows are not supported in new flow .

 Supervisor flows will be in Old UI.

125
126
127
Notes

5.19 Personalized Learning Recommendation (b1808 – Early


Adopter Care)
System Configuration > PERSONALIZED RECOMMENDATIONS
We have added relevant and personalized learning recommendations powered by machine
learning capabilities with SAP Leonardo. These targeted recommendations are based on taking
what we know about an individual user, including their profile information and learning activity,
and applying machine learning algorithms. Users help maximize relevancy by indicating topics
of interest which focuses the recommendations engine on delivering best fit recommendations
that math preferences.

Personalized learning recommendations enable users to find relevant courses from their
learning catalogs without needing to search through the catalog.

Requires Platform integration, Catalog content in English locales and users must have Access
Personalized Recommendations and Access Recommendations. Personalized
Recommendations are generated only for English locales.

NOTE: This feature is restricted to customers who qualify to be included in the early adopter
program.

Customers interested in enabling this feature can express their interest by filling out the form on
the page below:
https://influence.sap.com/sap/ino/#campaign/1572

128
Notes

6. Physical Resources
Scheduled offerings (section Error: Reference source not found) use resources to track physical
entities associated with delivering instructor led training. These resources include locations
(room level), facilities (building level), equipment and materials. Custom resources may also be
created by administrators and applied to Scheduled Offerings. Resources may be used as part
of a schedule conflict management solution as SuccessFactors helps administrators avoid
overbooking instructors and locations. Costs associated with resources may also be tracked,
and therefore the overall cost of instructor led delivery is derived. Resources also help
communication with Users, as Scheduled Offering registration emails contain resource
information such as the instructor, location and facility details.
New in 6.3, the resource search results provided during the scheduling process have been
enhanced to display the resource’s availability. The availability statuses include “not available”,
“available for entire scheduled offering”, “available for segment”, or “available for specific
segments”. This makes it easier to identify available instructors and locations, especially for
those offerings that span multiple days or weeks.
Negative value for custom resource component of delivery cost (1705)

129
Learning allows you to track the cost of delivering an offering. Some customers receive
subsidies or reimbursements from the government or other agencies and need away to account
for that offset to the cost. Custom resource cost validation has been modified to accept a
negative value; however, you cannot close an offering if the total offering cost is negative.
An admin can set a custom resource cost to a negative value to account for subsidies or
reimbursements of training delivery costs. Cost Summary, Close or Cancel offering screens and
reports with cost information will reflect the negative amount. Additionally, the bulk learning
event editor will allow the negative amount to be split across attendees; however, the new
tuition total cannot be less than zero.
The diagram below illustrates the relationship between Physical resources, Instructors and
Scheduled Offerings:

6.1 Facility
Facilities usually represent the buildings in which training is delivered. Facilities contain
locations and are associated with regions which allow Users to search for offerings in the region
in which they reside. The name of the facility can be included in the notification to the registered
user. Below are example facilities and discussion on how facilities will be entered
SuccessFactors by <Customer Name>.

130
References > Physical Resources > Facilities

Facility
ID Description External
Work Week Holiday Profile
Facility Time Zone
(30 (200 Char) Profile ID ID
(Y/N)
Char)

US American/Ne
HQ Headquarters N 5DAYWEEK
HOLIDAYS08 w York

Notes

6.1.1 Ad Hoc Facilities


Scheduled Offerings support the assignment of an ad hoc facility for those offerings scheduled
to take place at an external facility (e.g. hotel conference room). This is ideal for scenarios
where training is scheduled at places that should not be available as system records for re-use.
The ‘Enter Ad hoc Facility’ option is available when adding a new scheduled offering.

131
6.2 Location
A location usually represents rooms within facilities. SuccessFactors manages schedule
conflicts by warning administrators before double-booking locations. Locations are also an
important means of notifying Users where to attend instructor led training and non-training
events. Below is a list of example locations and discussion on how <Customer Name> will
create and manage locations. Users can search for Scheduled Offerings by Location.

6.2.1 Location Type


Location types may be specified at the item record level so administrators who schedule the
item can better choose the location for the training or event. Location types do not restrict the
scheduling administrators; rather suggest the type of room the training is designed for. Below is
a list of location types chosen by <Customer Name>:
References > Physical Resources > Location Types

Location Type ID Description


(30 Char) (40 Char)
CLASSROOM Classroom

132
Location Type ID Description
(30 Char) (40 Char)
CONFERENCE Conference Room
LAB Laboratory
VIDEO Video-enabled room

Notes

6.2.2 Locations
References > Physical Resources > Locations

Location ID Description Location


Facility Max Capacity
(30 Char) (100 Char) Type

Headquarters
HQ-MAINCONF Main Conference HQ
Room

Notes

6.3 Work Week Profile


Each facility may have a work week profile associated with it, which determines available
scheduling days. SuccessFactors warns administrators when attempting to schedule on a non-
working day, but administrators may choose to override the warning. If a facility has no work
week profile, the system assumes a normal five-day work week when scheduling. Below are
work week profiles chosen by <Customer Name>:
References > Calendars & Time > Work Week Profiles

Work Week Profile ID Description


(30 Char) (40 Char)
5 DAY WEEK Standard US 5-day Workweek (Mon – Fri)

133
Notes

6.4 Holidays
Holidays must be added to SuccessFactors and maintained accordingly as they reference exact
dates. One approach is to update holidays yearly – another is to create enough references for
upcoming years, provided the references have unique IDs.
References > Calendars & Time > Holidays

Holiday ID Description
Date
(30 Char) (40 Char)
20090101 New Year’s Day Jan 1, 2009

Notes

6.5 Holiday Profile


Facilities may have holiday profiles associated with them which serve to alert administrators
attempting to schedule offerings on those days. Administrators may always proceed through a
holiday warning. Holiday records must be created and maintained to reflect the next year in
which training may be scheduled. Below are example holidays and discussion on how holidays
will be entered SuccessFactors by <Customer Name>.
References > Calendars & Time > Holiday Profiles

Holiday Profile ID Holiday ID Description


Date
(30 Char) (30 Char) (40 Char)
2009HOLIDAYS 20090101 Jan 1, 2009 New Year’s Day

Notes

6.6 Calendars and Time (1611)


Admins can now disable unused time zones, update the labels and localize the names of the
time zones.
134
Note: Usage check for the time zone is done only in Schedule Offering, Program (Schedule
based), User/Admin Preferences, Sites, Facility and Instructor
References > Calendars & Time > Time Zones

Time Zone ID Description


(30 Char) (40 Char)

Notes

135
6.7 Materials
Materials are consumable supplies associated with the Scheduled Offering delivery. Materials
may contain inventory information to facilitate reorder processes. Materials, like other resources
may also have costs associated with them which calculate according to the chosen measure
into the cost of Scheduled Offering delivery. Material quantity on hand per Facility does not
deplete automatically when materials are used by Scheduled Offerings this subsequently
requires Administrators to manually adjust the material quantity. Below is a list of example
materials that <Customer Name> may create along with discussion of how materials may be
created and used.
References > Physical Resources > Materials

Material ID Description
(30 Char) (40 Char)

Notes

6.8 Equipment
Equipment represents non-consumable goods associated with training delivery, including
cameras, computers and projection systems. Equipment may be associated directly with
locations, so if the location is booked for a Scheduled Offering, the equipment is also booked.
Equipment may also be marked with a status indicator, such as ‘out of service.’ Below are
examples of equipment records and discussion on how <Customer Name> may use equipment.

6.8.1 Equipment Type


Equipment type is a categorization of equipment, which allows administrators to search for
equipment by type. Below is a list of equipment types chosen by <Customer Name>:
References > Physical Resources > Equipment Type

Equipment Type ID Description


(30 char) (40 char)
CAMC Camcorder
DIGCAM Digital Camera
DRYM Dry Erase Markers
DVD DVD Player
INET Ethernet Connection with access to the Internet

136
Equipment Type ID Description
(30 char) (40 char)
LAN Ethernet Connection (LAN access only)
LAP Laptop PC
LCD LCD Projector
MAC Macintosh/Apple Computer
MARK Markers
MIC Microphone
NOTE Large Notepad
OVER Overhead Projector
PC Desktop PC
PHONE Phone Line
POD Podium
TV Television
TVDVD TV/DVD Combo
VC Video Conferencing Equipment
WB White Board

Notes

6.8.2 Equipment Status


Equipment statuses help administrators track equipment that may be on loan or in need of
repair and prohibit some equipment from being scheduled. Below is a list of equipment statuses
chosen by <Customer Name>:
References > Physical Resources > Equipment Status

Equipment Status
Can Be Description
ID
Scheduled (40 char)
(30 char)
AVAIL Y Available for Use
REPAIR N Under Repair

137
Equipment Status
Can Be Description
ID
Scheduled (40 char)
(30 char)

Notes

6.8.3 Equipment
References > Physical Resources > Equipment

Equipment
Description Equipment Equipment Assigned Assigned
ID
(40 Char) Type Status Location Facility
(30 Char)

Notes

6.9 Regions
Regions are associated with User, facility, and instructor records. Region can be included as a
user attribute in assignment profiles. Regions are defined in section 4.1.19 of this document.
Notes

6.10 Custom Resources


To capture any other resources that do not qualify as instructors, locations, facilities, equipment
or materials, custom resources may be created. Like other resources, they may have costs
associated with them that factor into the cost of Scheduled Offering delivery. Below are custom
resources <Customer Name> may create.
References > Physical Resources > Custom Resources

Custom Resource ID Description


(30 Char) (40Char)
Mary’s Cafe Caterer

138
Notes

7. Online Content Management


Online learning refers to the electronic access of asynchronous training such as a slide show
presentation, an audio or video presentation, a web-based exam, or a document (e.g., a
Standard Operating Procedure manual). SuccessFactors Learning enables Users to launch
online content directly from their Learning Plans, Catalogs or Curricula and can automatically
record Learning Events for completed online Items.

7.1 Managing Online Content


Content Objects are the building blocks of an online Item. The Content Object contains the
content type information which determines if it tracks using AICC or SCORM calls (or if it is non-
tracking). The Content Object also contains the launch URL of the actual content residing on
the content server. Online content does not reside within the SuccessFactors database, but on
server that is accessible to the audience. SuccessFactors Exams are the exception as they are
created in SuccessFactors and do not require uploading to a content server location.
The Item below has several Content Objects, one non-tracking (PPT), one tracking via SCORM,
and another tracking via SuccessFactors Tracking functions. Simply put – the Item is the
container of online content and is used to deliver course modules to Users, and the Content and
Exam Objects are the references to that content.

7.2 Considerations
 As of 1508 iContent (Basic File Storage, 25GB) is part of every LMS subscription –
therefore it is highly recommended to avoid customer-owned content storage to
eliminate SCORM reverse-proxy issues.

139
 As of 1605 the legacy content entitlement service available from iContent servers has
been migrated directly into the LMS. This has operational benefits for customers for the
prior dependency on iContent servers, connectivity between LMS and iContent systems
etc. is eliminated.
 WBT content files are not actually stored in the LMS. The Legacy AICC and SCORM
importer (System Admin > Tools) only automatically creates the Content Object record
information, not the actual content. The new Import Content tool (7.3) allows content
files to be directly uploaded to the content server.
 AICC and SCORM 1.2 Content CAN pass a Non-Credited Completion Status (aka a
"FAILURE").
 SCORM 2004 Content CANNOT pass a Non-Credited Completion Status (aka a
"FAILURE")
 AICC and SCORM Assessments only track the User's MOST RECENT assessment
scores. Score history and iteration information are NOT tracked.
 SCORM 2004 "User Interaction" data is stored as a CLOB in the SuccessFactors
database. The SuccessFactors SCORM Exam Detail standard report can now provide
details from SCORM 2004 quizzes and exams.
 Unless there is a specific need for the additional data tracked and communicated by
SCORM 1.2 and SCORM 2004 data, your organization might consider using AICC
content. There are often less issues (less likely a cross domain issue), and less
impacted by JRE versions.
 SCORM content must be hosted behind the same DNS name as the SuccessFactors
instance to avoid a "Cross Domain Issue." If content is hosted elsewhere, then there
must be a reverse-proxy server, or a cross domain configuration in SuccessFactors for
the content.
 SuccessFactors only supports the following tracking data for AICC/SCORM data.
— Completion - Only at the Content Object level
— Score - Only score at the Content Object level. Each new attempt overwrites the
existing score value. This score is only available to administrators. It does not display in
the user interface after completion of the course.
— Time spent - Only at the Content Object level
— Bookmarking - Yes
— Objective level Data -Objective score and completion
— Interaction Data (i.e. Question level Data) - Only supported for SCORM 2004
content
 The ability to "Review Content" from Learning History for courses that a User has
already taken is ONLY available for AICC and SCORM content.
 Mastery Score - When Mastery Score is populated, it controls the passing score.

140
7.2.1 Mastery Score
Mastery Score may be configured at the Content Object level or specified at the Item record
level (online settings tab). Instead of SuccessFactors interpreting the accepted object
completion value, the score passed back to SuccessFactors determines whether the object is
completed successfully, and therefore whether the item may be successfully completed. A
specific SCORM or AICC content object can be considered completed once its mastery score
has been achieved. The configuration done at the Item’s Online Settings tab will override any
setting done at the Content Object. If the content is SCORM, the settings found in the SCORM
package will override any settings at the Item’s Online Settings tab.
Note: When content is imported into the TMS the mastery score does not always automatically
populate. It is possible for the content to automatically provide object completion based on
several variables including score.

141
7.3 Content Import Tool
Content > Tools > Import Content
The Content Import wizard has been enhanced and provides admins one access point for all
content import functionality. The import wizard will try to automatically detect the content type –
e.g. SCORM if a SCORM-manifest is detected. It supports import of AICC, SCORM, and non-
trackable content such as PDF files. It also supports settings for mobile offline. Unlike the
legacy import tools, the Content Import tool will upload the content files to different content
servers including iContent locations. Multiple deployment locations can be configured under
Content>Deployment Locations.
Administrators can also automatically assign content to a defined test user during the import
process allowing them to quickly check that the content has been uploaded properly and to test
the content in the system.
As of 1605, various improvements for the Content Import Wizard are delivered:
• New size limit threshold to determine which content import gets processed as a
background job and what can be processed real time
• Using email address of admin user uploading content for notification mail
• New support to deploy updates
• New support to deploy packages without manifest (i.e. static content)
• Option to use deploy setting for just some Deployment Locations
• Option to modify content object IDs in import wizard

Notes

7.4 Deployment Locations


Content deployment location fields configure servers where you deploy learning content. In
Content Deployment Locations, you can select a deployment location to which you can import
files, a feature formerly located in the System Configuration file. This tool allows you to select a
location with a name that is easily understandable when importing content such as videos and
web pages. All content uploaded to the specific deployment location will subsequently inherit all
the properties that you have set for deployment locations.
Deployment Location
ID:
Description:
Domain:

142
Host Name:
Port:
User Name:
Password:
URL Prefix:
Directory:
Test User: Select User
Location Type:
iContent Deployment:
Contact Email:
Display Order:
Comments:

Notes

7.5 Content Types


As multiple content vendors and tools may be used in a single SuccessFactors implementation,
it becomes important to maintain documentation of all types of online content. Below is a list of
types of online content that <Customer Name> documented during workshops, along with notes
detailing the extent of online content usage.
Provider or Tool Standards Hosted Notes
All internally developed web-
based training created in
Articulate (tool) SCORM 1.2 Internal
Articulate and exported as
SCORM 1.2 conformant.
Non-tracking – may be marked
PDF Documents (tool) None Internal
as complete when launched.
SuccessFactors Exams SuccessFactors
Internal Settings vary per exam.
(tool) Tracking

143
Notes

7.6 Content Objects and Packages


Below are sample Content Objects using the naming convention decided upon in workshops:
Content > Content Objects

Content Object ID Title


(30 Char) (200 Char)
HR _BasicTraining_001 New Employee Basic Training Module 1

Notes

A content package is a group of Content Objects and can be the result of importing a SCORM
manifest which creates more than one Content Object and groups them in a package. Below
are sample Content Packages using the naming convention decided upon in workshops:
Content > Content Packages

Content Package ID Title


(30 Char) (200 Char)
IT_Sec_2006 2006 IT Security Awareness Courses

Notes

7.6.1 Inline Content Launch


Each content object can be configured to launch in the same browser window or a new window
by enabling/disabling the ‘Launch in a New Browser Window’ setting on the content object
(Content > Content Objects > Launch Method). When content is opened inline in the same
browser window, the size of the IFrame that contains the content is controlled by separate
settings that can be defined by the admin (System Admin > Configuration > System
Configuration > LMS_ADMIN).

144
Notes

7.6.2 Enabling Content for Mobile Access


Each content object can be configured for mobile access by simply selecting a check box on the
content object record. When mobile access is not enabled, users will see a note for the content
indicating that it is not accessible on mobile devices.
Additionally, SuccessFactors supports mobile-specific versions of content: administrators can
enter an alternate file path for content designed specifically for mobile devices (Content >
Content Objects > Launch Method). When users launch a content object from a mobile device,
they will be presented with the content from the alternate file location.

Notes

7.6.3 Enabling Content for Offline Access


Each content object can be configured for download to be consumed offline on mobile devices.
The location of the content object in the content archive of a downloadable content object can
be set on the content object record (Content > Content Objects > Launch Method).
Requires:
offlinePlayerUpgradeEnables = true
Access Offline Player user workflow

Notes

7.6.4 AICC Document Wrapper


The SuccessFactors AICC Document Wrapper files encapsulate online documents into an
HTML page. This “Wrapper” uses AICC standards to communicate with SuccessFactors
Learning and record both the completion and the time spent in the content. Use the wrapper
with content that does not contain any mechanism for communication with SuccessFactors (e.g.
Adobe .pdf, MS Word .doc, etc.). The wrapper is used to force acknowledgement before a
Learning Event is recorded.
The AICC Wrapper is enabled directly on the Content Object record in the ‘Launch Method’ tab
(select the ‘User AICC Wrapper’ checkbox and enter the location of the content that needs to be
wrapped in the ‘Filename’ field).

145
The logo that is uploaded in the Images configuration is also used for the AICC wrapper. The displayed
text for the acknowledgement statement and the ‘Agree’/’Disagree’ buttons can be modified under the
Global Variables configuration (refer to section 9.1).

7.7 Documents
Documents in SuccessFactors are references to document locations and may provide a URL for the user
to launch a document via the User interface when associated with Items. When users access documents
there is no tracking in SuccessFactors Learning. Documents are not ‘uploaded’ into the SuccessFactors
database but must reside in a location which is accessible to the user (intranet, document repository,
LAN).

7.7.1 Document Types


Document Type is a way of categorizing documents and is a searchable criterion for administrators.
References > Learning > Document Type

Document Type ID Description


(30 char) (40 char)
MAN Manual
OPS Operations Guide

146
Document Type ID Description
(30 char) (40 char)
REF Reference Material
REG Regulations Document
SOP Standard Operation Procedure
TEXT Text Book

Notes

7.8 Objectives
Objectives are entities that link together SuccessFactors Exam Questions, Content Objects,
Competencies and Items. Questions created with SuccessFactors Question Editor are always objective
based, and these records are automatically created in SuccessFactors when questions are imported from
PQE. Sometimes Exams test Users on objectives associated with the Content Objects in an Item.
Depending upon the Exam settings, Users may receive credit (test out) of Content Objects if they
complete an objective within an Exam. Conversely, they may lose previously earned credit for
successfully completing Content Objects if they fail Exam objectives.

7.8.1 Objective Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Custom columns allow SuccessFactors administrators another option in searching for and reporting upon
groups of objectives. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be translated allowing
administrators to have a more thorough localized experience. Below is a list of Objective custom fields
that will be created by <Customer Name>:
System Admin > Custom Columns > Objective

Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description


OSHA 10 Y Y/N

Notes

7.9 Question Library Builder


Questions are the building blocks of exams. You can start building your question library in
anticipation of the upcoming exam feature that will be released. Question ID length is 100
characters.

147
7.9.1 Related Workflows
Admin:

 Add Question to Library


 View Library Question
 Edit Library Question
 Delete Library Question
 Copy Library Question
 Add Revision to Library Question
 View Objective Questions from Library
 Search Library Question
 Export Data

7.10 Questions (PQE Legacy Functionality)


Questions are typically created in SuccessFactors Question Editor and are presented to Users
randomly in a SuccessFactors Exam. They are normally objective based and may be therefore
linked to Content Objects within the same Item. This functionality will be removed. Do not use.
Please use Question Builder and the new Assessments Functionality.

7.10.1 Question Custom Columns (Custom Fields)


Custom columns allow SuccessFactors administrators another option in searching for and
reporting upon groups of questions. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be
translated allowing administrators to have a more thorough localized experience. Below is a list
of Question custom fields that will be created by <Customer Name>:
System Admin > Custom Columns > Question

Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description


Owner 10 N Compliance

Notes

7.11 Question Builder


The question builder extents the ability to create questions that can be used in exams and
replaces the legacy PQE “Question”. Questions are the building blocks of exams. You can start
building your question library in anticipation of the upcoming exam feature that will be released.

Supported Question Types:


 True/False
 Multiple choice - Single answer
 Multiple choice - Multiple answer
 Drag and drop - Order

148
 Fill in the blank / free-text

Related Workflows
Admin Workflows:
 Add Question to Library
 Edit Question
 View Library Question
 Edit Library Question
 Delete Library Question
 Copy Library Question
 Add Revision to Library Question
 View Objective Questions from Library
 Search Library Question
 Import Data
 Export Data

Add/Edit/Remove Images
The “Upload” pop-up allows you to:

 Select an image
 Enter alternative text (meant to be used by screen readers for accessibility support)
 Set the image as the default for all locales of that question that currently exist without an
image or for any locales that will be used in the future
 A thumbnail version of the images that are uploaded is shown to the administrator, along
with file size and alt text.

149
7.12 Assessments
A new unified tool to create and manage quizzes and exams. Quizzes are intended to be used
for quick knowledge checks and exams for formal assessments.
Assessments allow you to assess end users’ knowledge and retention and gain insight into
course effectiveness. Exams provide advanced features such as variants support, question
version control, question pools using objectives, and adaptive learning with objectives.

150
• Until Q2 2017, Quiz Builder was a separate tool. Starting with Q3 2017, Quizzes and
Exams are both available in the new unified Assessments tool.
• There is no impact to any quiz data and no action required from admins to modify
any existing associations.
• The Quiz Builder UI has been updated and all functionality continues to be available,
with the following changes:
• The workflow Manage Quiz Availability only controls whether an administrator
can publish or un-publish a Quiz. Selection of the primary locale, removing a
locale from a Quiz and adding a locale are now controlled by the Edit Quiz
workflow.
• When a new Quiz is created, the administrator is landed on the Quiz Overview
page, instead of the Questions page. The administrator can the select which
locale to open the editor in, by clicking on the locale link.
• Quiz questions now include support for adding images.

151
Related Workflows
Admin Workflows:
 View Exam
 Search Exam
 Add Exam
 Edit Exam
 Delete Exam
 Copy Exam
 Add Library Question to Exam
 Assign Library Question to Exam
 Manage Exam Availability

7.13 Exam Objects (Legacy Functionality)


Exam Objects are launch able online exams that use native SuccessFactors questions. Exam
objects can be used in the Level 2 surveys. There are many important settings on the Exam
Object record which determines its behavior, such as allowing Users to stop and resume the
exam and setting or clearing Objective flags for other online content within same Item. Reports
in SuccessFactors can supply and analyze all the exam results, User by User – or per Exam.
This differentiates SuccessFactors Exams from third party SCORM 1.2 or AICC exams, which
cannot be used to generate question-level response data in SuccessFactors Learning. This
functionality will be removed. Do not use. Please use the new Assessments Functionality.

152
7.13.1 Exam Custom Columns (Custom Fields)
Custom columns allow SuccessFactors administrators another option in searching for and
reporting upon groups of Exams. Custom field labels and reference descriptions can be
translated allowing administrators to have a more thorough localized experience. Below is a list
of Exam custom fields that will be created by <Customer Name>:
System Admin > Custom Columns > Exam

Label Col # Referenced Ref. ID Value or Field Description


Course # 10 N 100-567

Notes

7.14 Quiz Builder


Content > Quizzes
With this tool, administrators can create and deliver quizzes to end users. It also supports
localization and question-level feedback. Quizzes can be delivered by associating them with
Items, like exam objects. Admins can import/export quiz questions and other quiz data via the
Import/Export Data Tool (primarily used for managing question/answer text). Additional settings
available on quizzes include passing percentage, feedback display, randomization, and number
of attempts.

 The tool’s interface will serve as the basis for the replacement of Plateau Question
Editor (PQE), the legacy exam tool.

 Until feature parity has been reached (targeted for the second half of 2016), both tools
will remain available for use to all customers.
The following types of questions are supported in Quiz Builder:

 Single Answer

 Multiple Answers

 True or False

 Ordering (with drag-and-drop)

 Fill-in-the-blank

Notes

153
8. Data Privacy and Protection
SAP SuccessFactors Learning follows a deliberate process for irrevocably deleting user. At the
end of the process, user data is removed from the system and cannot be recovered. Clients
follow this process as part of your data privacy practice. BizX users are already purged from
BizX but purge of native Learning-only users such as external users, admin and instructors is
supported as of 1708.
Customers maintain internal policies for purging the personal data of former users from the
personal data of former users from their systems. These features aid customers in supporting
their policies.
Because Data Protection and Privacy touches every module, we have decided to talk about it as
a suite. You’ll find the suite-level announcements in the Data Protection and Privacy webinar.
Please refer to the webinar for updates.
SAP Help Portal – Setting Up and Using Data Protection and Privacy (available with the
Preview release). Available under SAP SuccessFactors HCM Suite
Community Forum on Data Protection and Privacy -
https://community.successfactors.com/t5/Data-Protection-and-Privacy/bd-p/Data-Privacy-and-
Protection
NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to adopt the features and measures that the
customer deems appropriate to achieve GDPR compliance

154
9. System Configuration
9.1 Configuration - Global Variables
9.1.1 General Settings
System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > General Settings

Selected
Setting Details Suggested Value
Value

The Default Global Currency


for the application.
Currency Administrators may choose USD
currency preference for items,
offerings and resources.
Percentage All percentages are displayed %
Symbol with this symbol.

Used to prefix auto-generate


ID’s if applicable. If Auto-
Generate ID’s is enabled for a
Site Prefix record type (System Admin > Blank
Application Admin), Site
Prefix may be included when
ID assigned.

Admin of record for LMS


Admin User ID triggered processes including ADMIN, PLATEAU
auto-filled registration of a
User.

Introduction Default Admin Introduction


(right-hand panel on Admin DEFAULT_ADMIN_INTRO
Panel ID
home page)

Curricula using items with


Calendar based intervals
Curriculum default Basis Date (start date 1/1/2018
Basis Date for calendar segmenting).
Basis Date can be modified
per Curriculum-Item.

Allows SuccessFactors to
Enable record item completion for
substitutes (if the Yes
Substitutes
relationships are created on
the item records.
155
Selected
Setting Details Suggested Value
Value
Enable
Substitutes in Allows SuccessFactors to
record item completion for Yes
Curriculum
Requirements substitutes within curricula

Completion of
later item
If using item revisions, this
revision
setting prevents users from
grants credit
having old revisions on their Yes
for previous
Learning Plan after
revision
completing newer revisions.
assignment in
Curricula
Bypass
second login If checked, the system does
after not force the user to login a Yes
password second time.
change:

When you enter a value in


the AICC Max-Normal box,
the system places that value
in the AICC Max-Normal box
on the Online Settings tab
AICC Max- when administrators create a 99
Normal new item record. This value
represents the maximum
number of content objects
that the system can open
simultaneously within that
item.
Capture Captures the Content object
Content score as the Item Grade
Object score when recording a learning
as Item grade event for the item. The Yes
when content must be configured
recording to record a learning event at
learning the item level.
Enable Inline No
Toggles the iframe option
Content
globally. In general, clear this
Launch
checkbox if you have a very
Configuration
controlled environment and
156
Selected
Setting Details Suggested Value
Value

you use versions of SCORM


or AICC that require a
separate window. When
clear, the Launch in a New
Browser Window check box
is not available in content
import and content objects.

If checked, then the system


places another Enable
Guide Me Mode check box
in each administrator's
preferences. If you select the
Enable Guide Me Mode
check box for your
preferences, then the system
Enable Guide allows you to click Use Yes
Me Mode Guided Mode when you
click a group of quick links on
your home page. Typically,
the purpose of using the
guided mode is to provide
less experienced
administrators with a guided
process for completing
routine, multi-step actions.

Defines the maximum priority


level. Levels are numeric
and globally configured up to
‘10’. This helps users to
prioritize their curriculum
Assignment assignments.
3
Priority Levels
Priority levels can also be
assigned to Assignment
Types to help users prioritize
their item assignments. The
Learning Plan can be
grouped by Priority.
Learning No
If checked, admins can
events can be
record learning events for
recorded prior
scheduled offering prior to
to the offering
157
Selected
Setting Details Suggested Value
Value

end date their end dates.

If checked, resource
scheduling conflicts are
prevented. This affects
instructors, locations, and
equipment when creating
Prevent and adding scheduled
Resource offerings and schedule No
Conflicts blocks. When a conflict is
detected, the system will
display an error message.
The admin will not be able to
commit the record until the
conflict is resolved.

Provides the option to allow


users who have completed
an assignment within 24
Grant Credit hours of a new assignment
for events to get credit. This is
completed the particularly recommended for No
day before customers with users in
assignment multiple time zones where
date administrators that assign
content are in a time zone
that is ahead of a user
completing the content.
Default Item The default cancellation
Cancellation policy to be applied to newly Blank
Policy created Items.
Default
Certificate The default certificate
template to be applied to Blank
Template for
Items items.

Default
Certificate The default certificate
template to be applied to Blank
Template for
Programs programs.

Enable QR No
If checked, users can attend
codes
training with a ‘boarding
158
Selected
Setting Details Suggested Value
Value

pass’ to their classes. The


system emails a QR code as
part of their enrollment
notification. They can print it
and bring it to class, where
the instructor can scan the
code and automatically
record that user's
participation.

If checked, the What You


See Is What You Get
Use Editor (WYSIWYG) notification
Content When template editor in System No
Sending Email Admin > Notification
Notification Templates is enabled. It is a
prerequisite to using the
editor.

Notes

9.1.2 Mail Settings


System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > Mail Settings (Mail Tab)

Setting Details Suggested Value Selected Value


Allows emails to be sent from
Disabled
SuccessFactors Learning.
Enable email: *Set to Yes when
Options Enabled, Disabled or
ready to use email
Generate without sending (For
notifications.
testing only)
FROM address for emails sent
from SuccessFactors to
Admin
Administrators. Emails for locked Admin@<Customer
Notification
Admin accounts and bounced Name>.com
Email:
emails are also sent TO this
address.
User FROM address for emails sent Admin@<Customer
Notification from SuccessFactors to Users. Name>.com
Email: Bounced emails are also sent TO

159
Setting Details Suggested Value Selected Value
this address.
Use Admin Using Instructor E-mail address
notification was different from other
email address notifications and there are privacy
for VLE concerns in exposing the E-mail
notifications address of the Instructor.
Email
How often emails in queue are sent
Frequency 5 (minutes)
to SMTP server.
(minutes):
Enable VCalendar attachments are
vCalendar associated with Scheduled Offering Yes
Attachments: Registration emails to Users.
Displays when “Enable vCalendar
Attachments” is selected.
Calendar Invites will be sent when
enabled.

Calendar Invites are sent only for


the primary recipients of the
notifications.
Primary recipients are:

 Users (Students) in case of


Send Enrollment notifications
Vcalendar  Primary Instructor when
attachments VLS session is scheduled Yes
as Calendar  Instructors for Instructor
invites Assignment Notification
Note:
In case of VLS segments being
part of the Scheduled Offering the
Calendar invites are sent for the
VLS Segments by the VLE
Enrollment notification, but ICS
attachments will be sent in place of
the Calendar invites for the System
Enrollment Notification to prevent
the VLS specific invite from being
overwritten automatically.

160
Setting Details Suggested Value Selected Value
Always use Ability to always use the VCAL
VCAL message from the Global template
message from even when the Notification Yes
the Global template is customized at the Item
templates or Scheduled Offering level.
Automatically sending Update
Automatically notifications when a segment of a
send Scheduled Offering is deleted.
Scheduled A cancellation notification would be
Offering sent for deletion of the Scheduled
Enrollment offering with VLS segments. Yes
Update Ability to always use the VCAL
Notification on message from the Global template
Segment even when the Notification
deletion template is customized at the Item
or Scheduled Offering level.
When “Send Vcalendar
attachments as Calendar Invite” is
enabled, there are some
notifications that are sent with an
ICS attachment for information
purpose.
Example: ICS attachments were
Suppress ICS
sent to supervisors when their
Attachments
subordinate enrolls for a
for
Scheduled Offering, Scheduled
Notifications
Offering Enrollment notification is
sent with ICS attachments in case
of VLS offerings.
These additional calendar
attachments were creating
confusion or blocking the calendar
in case of Supervisors.
If checked, then the system retains
Enable Email
a copy of every notification Yes
Archiving:
message that it sends
If enable email archiving is check
Purge Emails
this will enable the Purge Emails (3 Months)
Older than:
older than box.
BCC Address Enable BCC email archiving in
For Archiving: SAP SuccessFactors Learning so
161
Setting Details Suggested Value Selected Value
that Learning to keep a record of
the information that you sent to
users in email notifications and to
keep it on your email servers as
opposed to in SAP SuccessFactors
Learning.
When administrators create and
send ad hoc notifications, the
system requires that those
notifications contain a validly
constructed email address that the
notification should be sent from. If
you select Free-form for Send
notification from, then the system
allows administrators to type a
validly constructed email address.
If you select Admin, then the
system uses the email address for
that administrator's record (System
Admin>Application Admin>Admin
Send Management>Summary tab).
notification When you select Admin, Free-form
from: administrators cannot change who
the notification is sent from, which
means that if the administrator
does not have an email address,
then that administrator cannot send
an ad hoc notification. If you select
Select from list, then you must
provide a comma-delimited list of
email addresses; the system adds
the email address of the
administrator who is attempting to
send the notification to the top of
this list automatically, and the
administrator can select any one of
those email addresses.
Administrators may specify email
Block all addresses to blacklist. Addresses CEO@<Customer
emails to: on the blacklist will not receive any Name>.com
notifications from the LMS.

162
Notes

163
9.1.3 Electronic Signature Settings
Electronic signature settings provide another level of security in the form of a PIN when
recording learning events. Once enabled all Users and administrators must enter a PIN at the
next logon attempt.
The electronic signature feature for learning events supports the addition of multiple required
electronic signature approvals. For the Learning Event approval process a second process can
be initiated for additional approvals after the initial e-signature is signed. Additional approvers
will be able to approve or deny a learning event from their approvals page, and “sign” the event
with their electronic signatures.
For more information on approvals, see Approval Process settings.
Note: Disabling electronic signatures will automatically verify all unverified learning events.
If additional approvers have e-signed the learning completion, they are displayed on screens
that display the Learning History on Admin and User-side:
 Admin: User Snapshot > Items Completed > View Details.
 Admin: Users > Tools > Learning Event Editor.
 User: Learning History
In addition, the following fields are included in the Item History Audit Report for up to 7
approvers:
 E-Signature User Name
 Esig Meaning Code
 E-Signature Meaning Code Description
 E-Signature Message
 E-Signature User Comments

System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > Electronic Signature Settings

Electronic Signature Settings


Enable electronic signatures: Options: Y/N
Enable electronic signatures for external event: Options: Y/N
External Event additional Approval Process ID: (approval process
Default: Blank
dropdown)
Skip Additional Approval Process steps that do not have approvers: Options: Y/N
Default Electronic Signature for new
Default Electronic Signature for item: (Default setting for all new items) Options: Y/N
Default Electronic Signature for completion status: (Default setting for all
Options: Y/N
new statuses)
Completion Status additional Approval Process ID: (approval process
Default: Blank
dropdown)

164
Electronic Signature Settings
Default Electronic Signature for Curriculum: Options: Y/N
Default Electronic Signature for Competency: Options: Y/N
Default Electronic Signature for *Performance Review: (separately
Options: Y/N
licensed)
Default Electronic Signature for *Assessment Process: (separately
Options: Y/N
licensed)
Administrator Email: Default: Blank
Enable PIN Expiration: Options: Y/N
PIN Expires After (days): Default: Blank
Count Between Repeated PIN: (cannot reset PIN to same as last x
number of PINs) Default: Blank

Minimum PIN Change Period (days): (must reset PIN with this range of
days) Default: Blank

Administrator Default Esig Meaning Code: Default: Blank


Administrator Esig Description: Default: Blank
Users Default Esig Meaning Code: Default: Blank
Users Esig Description: Default: Blank
Instructor Default Esig Meaning Code: Default: Blank
Instructor Esig Description: Default: Blank

Notes

9.1.4 Esig Meaning Code


A meaning code identifies the reason for entering the electronic signature: Adding, modifying or
deleting a learning event are examples of the actions that may require e-signature entry by
administrators and Users. Administrators may choose from the available list of meaning codes,
while Users are forced to use the meaning code tied to the action they are performing (adding a
learning event).
References > System Admin > eSig Meaning Code

165
Meaning Code
Description
ID Admin/User
(40 Char)
(30 Char)
RECORD Admin Admin Recorded Learning Event
MODIFY Admin Admin Modified Learning Event

9.1.5 AICC Wrapper Settings


The text displayed to users within the AICC wrapper can be customized (and localized).
System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > AICC Wrapper Settings

Setting Default Value Selected Value


I confirm that I have read and
Confirmation Text: understand all the material
contained in this document.
Agree Button Text: Agree
Disagree Button
Disagree
Text:

Notes

9.1.6 Approval Process Settings


These are global settings that determine some behaviors associated with Approval Processes.
An administrator can set up any number of approval processes with several steps of approval.
Each step in the process can be assigned to a specific type of approver – employee, first level
supervisor, second level supervisor, and the newly added Instructor role.
System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > Approval Process Settings

Setting Details Selected Value


External Submission
SF-182 only. Default: Blank
Default Process ID:
External Verification
SF-182 only. Default: Blank
Default Process ID:
Enable External
SF-182 only. Default: Blank
Submission User Message:
External Submission User
SF-182 only. Default: Blank
Message:

166
Setting Details Selected Value
Default Internal Approval Default approval process for all new items.
Process ID: Admin may change per item. Default: Blank

Determines if Users with Approval Roles


may approve requests submitted by Users
Control Entity for Approval Options: Domain,
in specified Domains or Organizations. This
Role: Organization
is an important setting if using Approval
Roles other than Supervisor Level I and II.
Suppress final approval If ‘N’ Users receive two verifications – one
email notification for for registration update, another for Options: Y/N
Registrations: approval.
Suppress final rejection If ‘N’ Users receive two verifications – one
email notification for for registration update, another for approval Options: Y/N
Registrations: rejection.
Default User-Created Default approval process for new user-
Default: Blank
Account Process ID: created accounts.

Notes

9.1.7 Password Settings


System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > Password Settings

Password Settings
The following settings should be used if LDAP or SSO are in place as administrators and/or
users should not be allowed to request or reset their passwords via SuccessFactors Learning.
Allow user passwords to be changed Options: Y/N
Allow users to request their ID and password: Options: Y/N
Allow admin passwords to be changed Options: Y/N
Allow admins to request their password Options: Y/N
Note: Enabling both settings above for either Users and/or administrators results in
the Security Question functionality becoming suppressed.
The following settings apply to both admins and users for Native Authentication (non-
LDAP/AD/SSO) only:
Enable Password Aging: Options: Y/N
Password Expires After (days):

167
Notes

9.1.8 Login Lockout Settings


These settings apply to both administrators and Users and are applicable only if
SuccessFactors Native Authentication is in use (non-LDAP or SSO implementation). Users and
administrators who lock their accounts due to unsuccessful login attempts must answer their
security question and then receive a new encrypted password via email if they have an email
address if the Login Lockout setting is enabled.
System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > Login Lockout Settings

Login Lockout Settings


Login Attempts:
Time Period for Login Attempts (hours):
Allow Admins and Users to Unlock Own Accounts: Options: Y/N

Notes

9.1.9 Delegate Settings


Supervisor delegation allows supervisors (delegators) to entrust others with their Learning
responsibilities. A delegate is another user who is identified to perform the functions that the
supervisor would normally perform.
If the administrator selects the Predefined Permissions check box, then supervisors can provide
the predefined permissions to another user. If the administrator selects the Selected
Permissions check box, then supervisor can select the workflows that he wants to grant to the
user, allowing the supervisor to delegate specific tasks.
System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables > Delegate Settings

Login Lockout Settings


Allow Supervisors to Delegate
Predefined Permissions: Options: Y/N
Selected Permissions: Options: Y/N

Notes

9.1.10 Virtual Learning System Synchronization Frequency


VLS synchronization is the process that transfers information from SuccessFactors
Administration to your VLS server. For example, if you add an instructor in SuccessFactors
168
Administration, the instructor record is synchronized from SuccessFactors Administration to
your VLS server so that the instructor is recognized in both systems.
When you enter a number of minutes into the Synchronization Frequency box, the
synchronize VLS background job sleeps during that amount of time before running again. The
system shows the Synchronization Frequency box if the enabled attribute on the Vle element
in LMS_ADMIN is set to true.

Setting Selected Value


Synchronization Frequency: ______ Minutes

9.2 (Basic) Configuration


9.2.1 Certificate Templates
System Admin > Configuration > Certificate Templates
Administrators can create custom templates for Certificate of Completion. Templates can be
customized by inserting syntax tags, editing HTML/CSS and embedding images via the
Certificate Template Editor. Custom certificates can be generated using default templates for all
Items, Scheduled Offerings and Programs or can be customized for individual Items, Scheduled
Offerings or Programs. Templates can be localized to enable users to print a certificate in their
preferred locale.
Borders, colors, font-sizes and placement of text are controlled using HTML and CSS. Logo
image is associated with the template and uploaded to the application (maximum of 5 images
can be uploaded). Default template can be specified at the system level for Items and
Programs (Section 9.1.1). Scheduled Offerings default to the template for the parent Item.
System level default can be overridden at the Item, Scheduled Offering and Program level.
Notes

9.2.2 Connector Settings


You can use the connector settings area to configure how or if you want the application to
create and purge the archive files of the connector imports. These archive files represent what
the system uses whenever it executes one of the system connectors (System
Admin>Connectors). For other connector settings, please refer to the Connectors Workbook.
System Admin > Configuration > Connector Settings

Connector Settings
Enable input file archive: Options: Y/N
Purge archived input files older Define frequency to purge archive files in Month(s).
than: Typically, 3 months

169
Notes

9.2.3 Consent Statements


Manage the Data Privacy Consent Statements (DPCS) life cycle in the LMS if your company
seeks consent from users to store personal information. Familiarize yourself with your local data
privacy laws. After you know how you are legally required to process personal data at your
company, you’ll have a better understanding of your need for consent statements.
Before you upload consent statements, you create the consent statements with your legal team
and then translate them into each language (locale) in your Learning system. Save the consent
statements as PDF files.
• Only one statement can be published at a time.
• When a statement is published, the previous published statement is automatically
archived

Employee Comments
Required Title Document
Type

Internal Y/N Data Privacy Statement


External Y/N

Notes

9.2.4 Content Players


The Content Player feature is used when the association between the player and the content
object or exam is not automatic in the user's environment. The administrator can locate a
player that will be accessible by all users attempting to launch the content for which the player is
associated.
SuccessFactors compliant player refers to whether the selected player can read and interpret
SuccessFactors Player command line parameters.
Prompt for bookmark usage prior to player execution will allow the LMS to prompt the user to
choose whether to resume an exam or content object at a specified bookmark. This feature
works for SuccessFactors compliant players only.

System Admin > Configuration > Content Player

170
Executable Path SuccessFactors Prompt for
Content compliant player bookmark usage
Description
Player ID prior to player
execution

Option Y/N Option Y/N

Option Y/N Option Y/N

Notes

9.2.5 Easy Links


An Administrator can set up additional links that will display on the user interface called Easy
Links. Navigate to System Admin>Configuration>Easy Links. These links point to URLs that
you specify in the configuration screen shown below. The links open from the TMS window.
The links will be listed for the users in the order they are listed in the configuration screen. The
URL for these links must begin with http. The Label IDs are provided in the list, but the label
values must be edited under References>Geography>Labels.
Administrators can remove links from the application at any time by removing the URL from the
Easy Links page. Some Easy Links can now to set to be hidden when viewing the end user
form, as well as the supervisor links. The user can set some of the links to be hidden in a ‘more’
link. There is a configuration (wrench icon) on the links area that allows for this configuration. It
is per user and is across sessions. If the Admin adds a link, it is automatically displayed. The
user must show at least one link.
System Admin > Configuration > Easy Links

ID Label ID URL Value User Role


User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink1 http:\\companypolicies.com
1 DEFAULT

User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink2


2
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink3
3
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink4
4
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink5
5
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink6
6

171
ID Label ID URL Value User Role
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink7
7
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink8
8
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink9
9
User Easy Link data.menu.EasyLink10
10

Notes

9.2.6 External Reports


The External Reports section contains links to external, HTTP accessible reporting tools. You
can both configure and run the reports from this section.

Notes
Will the client use an external tool to generate reports from SuccessFactors Learning?

9.2.7 Gamification Settings


Gamification involves allowing customers to introduce gaming concepts in the system to
increase adoption, excitement, and engagement. Gamification of Learning could motivate users
through rewarding with points, Recognition, Certifications and Badges for Learning activities.
There are various Gamification aspects, and this is best achieved by integrating with a suitable
Gamification Platform. Integration with Bunchball Nitro is supported. The Gamification
integration can be enabled at System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration >
Gamification Settings.
Once the connection with the Gamification service is enabled, the administrator can configure
events to be published and define points for an item/learning activity in the system.
Gamification rules are defined in the Gamification service.
System Admin > Configuration > Gamification Settings
Gamification Settings: Entity Event Configuration Settings – Item
Event Base
Event ID Published Event Description
Name Points

This event is published when the


lms_item_completed Completion Y/N Learning Event is recorded for the
user.

172
Gamification Settings: Entity Event Configuration Settings – Item
Event Base
Event ID Published Event Description
Name Points

This event is published when the


lms_item_enrolled Enrollment Y/N user receives a registration status
of Enrolled.
This event is published when the
lms_item_launched Launch Y/N user launches an item for the first
time.
lms_item_rated Rated This event is published when the
Y/N
user rates an Item.
lms_item_shared Share This event is published when the
Y/N
user recommends an Item.

Gamification Settings: Entity Event Configuration Settings – Program


Event Base
Event ID Published Event Description
Name Points

This event is published when


lms_program_completed Completion Y/N the Learning Event is recorded
for the user.
This event is published when
lms_program_enrolled Enrollment Y/N the user receives a registration
status of Enrolled.
lms_program_rated Rated This event is published when
Y/N
the user rates a Program.
This event is published when
lms_program_shared Share Y/N the user recommends a
Program.

Gamification Settings: Entity Event Configuration Settings – QuickGuide


Event Base
Event ID Published Event Description
Name Points

This event is published


lms_quickguide_completed Completion Y/N when the user views the
QuickGuide for the first time.
This event is published
lms_quickguide_enrolled Published Y/N when the user Publishes the
QuickGuide for the first time.

173
Gamification Settings: Entity Event Configuration Settings – QuickGuide
Event Base
Event ID Published Event Description
Name Points

This event is published


lms_quickguide_rated Rated Y/N when the user rates a
QuickGuide.
This event is published
lms_quickguide_shared Share Y/N when the user recommends
a QuickGuide.

Notes

9.2.8 Landing Page Settings


These settings control the default view of the Learning landing page by choosing which tiles to
make available and setting the starting positions and the sizes of the tiles. Users can
personalize their home pages by moving or changing the tile size to suit their preference. The

174
administrator can also choose to lock the tile locations preventing users from customizing the
page.
The Learning landing page custom content tile has helpful preset sizes to choose from, or the
administrator can design a custom size by selecting height and width options. Pixel sizes for
each dimension are displayed to further aid the administrator. Administrators designing a
custom tile can view the tile in a preview window. The height and width can be dynamically
adjusted so the admin can see how the content fits relative to the tile’s size.
The Recommended User Interface Display setting in User Settings (13.2.13) must be enabled
for the following settings to apply.

As of 1705, custom tiles can be displayed for selected organizations or Groups.

System Admin > Configuration > Landing Page Settings


Landing Page Settings: Default
Show
Title Active Dates Default Size
Expanded

My Learning 612 x 612


All N/A
Assignments Option: Custom /
Small Banner
All (Option: Move to Not Large
My Curricula N/A
Used) Option: Large
Landscape
All (Option: Move to Not Medium
Learning History N/A
Used) Option: Large
All (Option: Move to Not Large Landscape
Find Learning N/A
Used) Option: Banner
All (Option: Move to Not Option:
Links Medium
Used) Y/N

175
Landing Page Settings: Default
Show
Title Active Dates Default Size
Expanded

All (Option: Move to Not Large


My Employees N/A
Used) Option: Large
Landscape
All (Option: Move to Not Horizontal
Recommendations N/A
Used) Option: Medium
All (Option: Move to Not Large
Bookmarks N/A
Used) Option: Medium
All (Option: Move to Not Medium
Featured N/A
Used)
Option: Horizontal

Landing Page Settings: Not Used (list any tiles that are not in use in default view)
Title
Available Offerings
Option: Move to Default (if used – 296 x 375)
Self-Assigned
Option: Move to Default (if used – Option: Large / Medium)

Custom tiles can be created and assigned to user in different organizations or groups (as of
1705). Below are custom tiles for <Customer Name> that will be configured.
+ Add Custom Tile
Landing Page Settings: Add Custom Tile
Tile Name (Choose a name that describes the type
of tile you’re creating. This name is not shown to
your users)
Show Tile For This Group / Include suborganizations

Options: All dates/Only certain dates


Show Tile on These Dates If ‘Only certain dates’:
From Date:
To Date:
Tile Display Size Options: Medium/Large/Extra
Large/Custom

176
Landing Page Settings: Add Custom Tile

If ‘Custom’:
(custom size can be adjusted in Preview window) Width (pixels):
Height (pixels):
Configure tile content for the selected locale Options: Language packs installed
Tile Title (This is the title users see at the top of the
tile)
Description (This is the description users see in their
Tile Browser)
*Copy above table and add for each custom tile to be created

Notes

Custom Landing Pages


Customers can create up to 5 custom landing pages that extend the area that you have to
position tiles. You may choose to have a simple home page with just important tiles and links,
while other custom landing pages house additional tiles.
The custom page displays to the user if it is active, has an effective date today or in the past
and the user has access to at least 1 tile on the custom page. If not, navigation element to the
page isn’t available to the user.

Page Name Status Tiles

Title
Active Dates
Default Size
Link
Show Expanded

Insert new table for each additional page.

177
Notes

9.2.9 Fiori User Interface


The New UX for the SFSF Home Page is built on FIORI LaunchPad framework organizes role-
based, time-sensitive information and insights on one personalized start page. From the home
page, you can take quick action and identify areas requiring further analysis.
You can now enable the new Home Page user experience in the Upgrade Center. Your existing
home page configuration settings are retained and applied to the new home page where
possible, but some additional configuration steps may be required. Please refer to the
SuccessFactors Home Page Administration Guide for more details.

These settings affect the LMS UI (BizX Theme with Fiori styling is “SF Fiori Style Blue Crystal
Theme - Interior Pages):

 Home and My Employees


 Item Record
 Scheduled Offering and Registration Flow
 Content Structure Pages
 Task Checklist and Manage Observers
 Curriculum Status and Curriculum Record
 Program Agenda
 Learning History
 Search Activities by Competency (CDP)
 Cover page tabs
 Localization popup for titles
 Some page layout, such as registration and task checklist

Customers using LMS branding that wish to keep the branding styles will need to update
their CSS to use updated style sheet classes.

Current UX Fiori UX

178
9.2.10 Images
This setting provides the ability to upload custom images to personalize the UI and thumbnail
images in the application.
System Admin > Configuration > Images
Image Name Notes
Logo Max size (width, height) 190x50.

Ideally the logo should have a transparent background color to allow


the graded logo bar color to show through.

Background Image The Background Image underlies all pages throughout the User UI

Placemat Image The Placemat image borders the User UI content and overlays the
background image. As with the default image the Placemat may be
transparent allowing the background image to be seen behind it.

Thumbnails The ideal dimensions are 16:9 ratio.


Available for the Entity Types:

 Curriculum
 Quick Guide
 Questionnaire Surveys
 Task Checklist
 External Links

179
 Blended Item
 Online Item
 Instructor-Led Item
 Other Item
 External-Course
 Programs

Notes

9.2.11 Module Tab


The Module Tab Configuration file is a tool to configure the admin display of entity tabs and
should be left to system Administrators to change. Changes to the module tabs are global and
therefore affect all administrators with access to the entities modified. It is recommended that no
changes be made to the Module Tab files in the application configuration phase, as it is difficult
to identify what entity’s tabs should be reordered and what tabs should be removed until
administrators become more familiar with the interface. Changes may be made to these files at
any time. It is also recommended to make a text file copy of the Module Tab files before editing.
Note: We do not recommend making changes to this as the Admin Interface will be
changing.
Notes

9.2.12 OAuth Token Server


This setting provides the information needed for obtaining the OAuth access token that will be
utilized when calling the Learning Public REST APIs. The public key is used by the client to
validate the digital signature of the OAuth access Token.
The following list is the first wave of RESTful Webservices that will be available with the 1308
release. The LMS will serve as the token server for these WebServices.

 Get Learning History


 Add/Update User
 Get Available Scheduled Offerings
 Search Catalog
 Get Item Details
 Get Item Prerequisites
 Get Item Related Documents
 Get Scheduled Offering Details
 Get Subject Areas
 Item Self-Assignment
 Scheduled Offering Self-Enrollment

180
Notes

9.2.13 Registration Settings


These settings control global Scheduled Offering behaviors. Registration statuses must be
entered as Learning References before they may be referenced as a default status.
System Admin > Configuration > Registration Settings

Setting Details Selected Value


Default Self- Sets the Self Registration flag
Registration Setting (Summary Tab) for new items by Options: Y/N
for New Items default.
Default Supervisor Sets the Supervisor Registration
Registration Setting flag (Summary Tab) for new Options: Y/N
for New Items items by default.

By Default Enable Allows the admin to configure the


Cancellation cancellation reasons and enable
Reasons for a them at the SO level.
scheduled offering

Apply Registration Disallows system auto-


Cut-off to Auto Fill registration if Scheduled Offering Options: Y/N
Registration cut-off date/time is in the past.
Approvers will not see the
Apply Registration
learning registration or withdraw
Cut-off and Start
approval request for a scheduled Options: Y/N
Date to Approval
offering if the registration cut-off
Process
date is in the past.
Allows (or disallows) supervisors
Supervisors can
to register subordinates in
override item Options: Y/N
scheduled offerings if users have
prerequisites
not met prerequisites.
Supervisors can Allows (or disallows) supervisors
override Scheduled to register subordinates in
Offering maximum scheduled offerings that have met Options: Y/N
capacity capacity.
Allows (or disallows) supervisors
Supervisors can to register subordinates in
override registration scheduled offerings that have Options: Y/N
threshold passed the registration cut-off
date.

181
Setting Details Selected Value
If you select this check box, then
when you withdraw a user from a
scheduled offering, or users
Remove associated withdraw themselves, the
item from learning associated item is removed from
plan when admin the selected user’s learning plan.
withdraws User(s) Clearing the check box allows Options: Y/N
from scheduled users to keep the item to request
offering(s) another scheduled offering. For
example, if a user cannot attend
one scheduled offering but still
needs the learning item.
When registering
other employees Select the account to use for Options: User or
use account codes supervisor registrations. Supervisor/Delegator
of
To bring consistency in the
Enforce Approval
application on the enforcement of
when Supervisor or
Approval process when
HRBP Registers / Options: Y/N
Supervisors or HRBPs register or
Withdraws
withdraw employees regardless
Employee
of the entry points.
Options: (select all that apply)
 User
All Scheduled Offering notification
Confirmation  Instructor
settings default to these
Notification  Supervisor
recipients. Admins may override
Defaults:
these settings per offering.  Contacts
 Organization (slot
confirmation only)
Maps registration statuses
(References> Learning) as the
default Enrolled, Waitlisted, Enrolled: ENROLL
Registration Cancelled and Pending Status. Waitlisted: WAITLIST
Statuses Only change if there are Cancelled: CANCELLED
additional registration statuses
Pending: PENDING
that should replace default
statuses.

Notes

182
9.2.14 User Password Settings
If using SuccessFactors Native Authentication (not LDAP or SSO) this is the default User
password all Users must enter upon initial login. All Users must change this password to their
own (compliant with password rules set in section 13.3.16).
System Admin > Configuration > User Passwords

User Password (1-40 Char) Suggested Value Selected Value


User Password STUDENT, P@ssw0rd

Notes

9.2.15 User Settings


These settings affect all SuccessFactors Users. Some are dependent upon menu level access
determined by the User Role assigned to the User.
System Admin > Configuration > User Settings

User Settings
Prevent Admins and Supervisors from creating user schedule conflicts.
(Administrators and Supervisors may never double book a User in a Options: Y/N
Scheduled Offering if enabled)
Prevent Users from creating user schedule conflicts. (Users may never
Options: Y/N
double book in a Scheduled Offering if enabled)
Enable User to choose the Schedule Offering Time Zone display. Options: Y/N

Default to User’s Time Zone for display of Schedule Offerings. Options: Y/N

Allow Users to change Regional Information. Options: Y/N


Allow self-registration to proceed as long as the prerequisites will be
Options: Y/N
completed prior to the scheduled start date.
Allow Users to assess Competencies of their own. Options: Y/N
Allow Users to access online content without registration. (refers only to
Options: Y/N
Blended Items)
Allow Users to change currency Options: Y/N
Enable User Item Requests (Default Setting - this may be overridden at
Options: Y/N
Item level).
Allow Supervisors to assess competencies for their employees. Options: Y/N

Enable Exam Objects for iPad Options: Y/N

Show Revision Information Options: Y/N

183
User Settings

Allow Supervisor to remove Alternate Supervisors Options: Y/N


Enable Approval Waiver when Supervisor or HRBP assigns Online Item,
Options: Y/N
Blended Item or External Course
Threshold for
Warn the supervisor for recent Number of days?
Items/Programs (days)
assignments/registrations, Options:
completions or unmet prerequisites Y/N Threshold for
during assignment Scheduled Offerings Number of days?
(days)

Notes

9.2.16 User Security Question Settings


If using SuccessFactors Native Authentication (no LDAP or SSO), all Users must enter a
Security Question and answer at initial login. This is used for password retrieval purposes if the
User forgets password.
System Admin > Configuration > User Settings

User Security Question Settings


Security Answer Minimum Length 5

Notes

9.2.17 Users Learning Event Recording Defaults


These settings require additional User workflows in the User Role, granting access to the
Record Learning page. At the Item record level, Administrators may choose to enable or disable
the ability for Users and/or supervisors to record learning events for that specific Item.
System Admin > Configuration > User Settings

User Learning Event Recording Defaults


Users can record learning events for items: Options: Y/N
Supervisors can record learning events for items: Options: Y/N

As of 1702, an approval process can be configured to require approval for self-recorded


learning. Admins can make a choice whether to require approval only for internal events, or
also for external events.

184
Notification templates for Approved/Denied notifications sent to users:
 UserRecordedCompletionApprovalProcessRequestApproved
 UserRecordedCompletionApprovalProcessRequestDenied

Notification template for Approval required notification to supervisor:


 UserRecordedCompletionApprovalProcessApprovalRequired

As of 1708, when Approval for record learning events is enabled, file upload is supported.
Users may need to post documents that show their completion (such as a completion certificate)
and the approver needs to view the attachment as proof of learning completion.

Notes

9.2.18 Learning Plan Notification Settings


These settings control the User Learning Plan notifications – whether Users/Supervisors should
receive the notifications and if they may choose themselves.
Note: These notifications are triggered by the Learning Plan Notification APM (11.1.10) and
include a rolled-up list if applicable.
System Admin > Configuration > User Settings

Learning Plan Notification Settings


Notify User when an Item is added to their Learning Plan: Options: Y/N
Notify User when an Item is modified in their Learning Plan: Options: Y/N
Notify User when an Item is removed from their Learning Plan: Options: Y/N
Notify Supervisor when a User successfully completes an Item: Options: Y/N

185
Learning Plan Notification Settings
Notify Supervisor when a User unsuccessfully completes an
Options: Y/N
Item:
Allow User to modify Learning Plan notification settings: Options: Y/N

Notes

9.2.19 Coupon Display Settings


System Admin > Configuration > User Settings

Coupon Display Settings


Options: Show Coupon Area Always / Show Coupon Area
Configure how to display
Never / Show Coupon Area Only when User has Active
coupons to users:
Coupons

Notes

9.2.20 User Login/New Account Panels


User Login Panel displays the HTML below on the User side login screen (if using
SuccessFactors Native Authentication or LDAP and no custom login screen). User New
Account Panel displays the HTML below if the New User option is enabled (User Settings: Allow
Users to create a new account at the SuccessFactors Learning login page.)
System Admin > Configuration > User Settings

User Login/New Account


Display
Panels
<p><span class="InstructionalText">To login, enter your user
ID and password in the space provided to the right. If you
have forgotten your user ID or password, links below the login
User Login Panel:
box will assist you in recovering your credentials. If you do not
have an ID and would like to register, please click the "New
User?" link below the login box.</span></p><p></p><p></p>
User New Account Panel:

Notes

186
9.2.21 External User in Platform
This feature enables creation of an external user in platform when a user self-registers on a
Learning site. Optionally the user can be created as an external user in Jam as well. Currently,
an external user that self-registers on a Learning site (not the native registration) will be a
Learning only user with no access to the platform or its features, such as Jam. With this release,
you can enable creation of an external user in platform when a user self-registers on a Learning
site.
CAUTION:
Enabling this feature will not automatically migrate existing external users. Upgrade of existing
external users is not supported. This feature should not be enabled if you have existing external
users in your system. Please contact your SuccessFactors Services representative if you want
to adopt this feature and have existing external users that you wish to migrate.
When the user updates language in platform, that change flows to Learning. Conversely,
updates to the language in learning flow to Platform. Note that zh_HK and en_CA are
languages only offered in Learning.

 Mapping of LMS to BizX:


o LMS Chinese Hong Kong zh_HK = BizX Chinese Traditional zh_TW
o LMS English Canadian en_CA = English US en_US

Username must be in English characters; country codes in the LMS must be limited to 2
characters.
In addition to Language, certain fields updated in Learning by user or Admin will also be
updated in platform. These fields are First, Last or Middle name/initial, and contact information,
including email address and phone number.
Universal: For users that self-register on an LMS site after this release, learning notifications
with a direct link (newsletter) will take the user to the login page of the site the user initially
registered on versus the native Learning login page. This does not apply to direct links created
by an administrator in System Admin> Tools> Direct Link.
Prerequisites:

 Integration with platform and optionally integration with Jam


 To enable for a site, “Registration Validation” must be None or Registration Code
(Approval flow for account creation is not yet supported); and User Interface Display
must be set to Recommended Login Page
 Platform role-based permission is enabled
Set-up in Platform:
Setup to support creating an external user in platform via Learning site will be available in a
guide on SAP Help portal. Following is a summary:
1. Enable External Learning User in Provisioning

187
2. In platform, create a group for external learning users, create the permission role for all
external users and grant this role to the external learning users’ group. (Self-registering
users will immediately get this role upon registration. Administrator can add the user to
other groups as well.)
3. Enable Integrated External User in Learning (System Admin Configuration  System
Configuration  BizX, set createIntegratedExternalUser=true)
4. Optionally, map the platform theme to the Learning Brand to be used for the site.
5. Optionally, require email address for registration and require email address to be unique.
Self-service password recovery requires a unique email address.
Platform administrative capability
• Reset an external user’s password or account
• Add the external user to a permission group
JAM Integration
External users in platform and Jam can only join External groups in Jam.

 Updated Jam integration to include support for Jam External group type if Jam
integration is enabled. Invitation is required to join this group type.
 Link to Jam from Learning leverages the Jam configured overview page if enabled by
the group admin (Edit Group> Setup)
 As part of the Jam upgrade, the identifier for a Jam group in Learning was modified from
an integer to the Jam UUID. If the old integer identifier is used in any custom reports,
your reports will need to be updated to use the new column JAM_GROUP_UUID in
PA_CPNT_JAM_GROUP table as the GROUP_ID column is no longer applicable.

9.2.22 User-Created Account


THIS FEATURE WILL BE REPLACED BY THE EXTERNAL USER IN PLATFORM FEATURE
FOR INTEGRATED CUSTOMERS. DO NOT IMPLEMENT FOR INTEGRATED CUSTOMERS
– USE EXTERNAL USERS IN PLATFORM.
Administrators can configure the fields that will be displayed on the new user-creation screen.
Administrators can configure fields as mandatory, thus enabling customers to present important
fields to users while hiding unnecessary or undesired fields of information.
User-Created Accounts via Sites
The system default User-Created Accounts settings can be overridden at the site level by
admins (System Admin > Application Admin> Sites > User-Created Account). User data (email
address, user custom fields, etc.) provided during the registration can also be edited by the
users themselves via the Options and Settings link from the learning homepage.
Login Site:

188
External users that self-register on an LMS site. Starting in Q3 2016, learning notifications with a
direct link (newsletter) or links in password recovery flow, take the user to the login page of the
site the user initially registered on (Login Site) versus the native Learning login page. This
enhancement allows an admin to view and modify the Login Site on the user snapshot.

189
System Admin > Configuration > User-Created Account

New User Settings


Allow Users to create a new account at the SuccessFactors Learning
Options: Y/N
login page.
Approval required. Options: Y/N

Allow Users to choose an ID while creating a new account. Options: Y/N


User-Created Account Introduction Message:
Please complete the "Create New Account" form and click Submit. After Default selected
you create an account, you can view your To-Do List, add items to your
cart, and check out.
User-Created Account Success Message:
Thank you for registering. Your user ID is now active in the system and Default selected
your To-Do List will be updated within 24 hours based on any auto
assignments your administrator has set up.

New User-Created Account Screen


Field Display Mandatory
Contact Information
User ID: Yes Yes
Password/Re Enter Password: Yes Yes
Security Q&A: Yes Yes
First Name: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Middle Initial: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Last Name: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Email Address: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Contact Address Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Main Address: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
City: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
State / Province: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Postal Code: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Telephone Number: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Employee Information

190
New User-Created Account Screen
Field Display Mandatory
Job Location: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Commerce
Billing Address: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Billing Phone Number: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Shipping Address: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Shipping Phone Number: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Preferences
Locale: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Default Currency: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Default Time Zone: Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
Custom Columns (5 available)
1. Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
2. Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
3. Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
4. Options: Y/N Options: Y/N
5. Options: Y/N Options: Y/N

Notes

9.2.23 VLS Configuration


If VLS is licensed, the required configuration file(s) for the integration(s) can be added and
modified in this section. As of 1611, the password will be encrypted, once the configuration is
saved.

9.3 Auto Generate IDs


These settings determine if ID’s are automatically generated and assigned when certain types
of entities are created by Administrators (or Users creating their own account).
System Admin > Application Admin > Auto Generated IDs

191
ID Enable ID Prefix Site Prefix Ordering

Options:
Item Options: Y/N Options: Y/N Site, ID
ID, Site
Options:
Equipment Options: Y/N Options: Y/N Site, ID
ID, Site
Options:
Instructor Options: Y/N Options: Y/N Site, ID
ID, Site

Options:
User Options: Y/N Options: Y/N Site, ID
ID, Site

Notes

9.4 Brands – formerly called Branding Styles


Brands create a custom look and feel specific to an organization, a domain, or system. Each
brand relates to a Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) that defines the look of the user interface
and/or custom header and footer which is defined by the admin in the UI. The branded header
and footer support HTML and will override header/footer provided in the resource path. Each
site can have a different brand associated to it thus allowing a different look and feel for each
site.
The rules of brands are as follows:
 The brands appear only in the end-user environment.
 Domain supersedes Organization if a User resides in both a Domain and an
Organization that reference alternate Brands.
 If the user is logged into the system through a Site, then the system uses the brand of
that user's site.
 In the absence of a brand at the domain or organizational level where a site is not being
used, the system brand is used.
System Admin > Application Admin > Brands

Introduction Domains /
Brand ID Resource Path
Panel ID Organizations
/
Customers CUST_INTRO
content/branding/customers

192
Introduction Domains /
Brand ID Resource Path
Panel ID Organizations

Notes

9.5 Sites
Sites allow external Users access to SuccessFactors to view catalogs and create their own User
account to access Items and/or Curricula. All Users created via this process have ‘external’
shopping account types, which requires them to use the shopping cart to self-assign Items.
External Users never require approval if approval processes are associated with the Items
and/or Scheduled Offerings. One benefit to using Sites is controlling the Domain and
Organization of new User-created accounts. Users may also create their own accounts (if
enabled) but the new accounts are created in the Public Domain unless Sites are used.
Admins can also indicate whether a site requires registration validation with valid registration
codes or an approval process. A User that is self-registering at a site that requires a
Registration Code will be required to submit a valid code along with their account information
prior to gaining access to the system. If the user enters an incorrect code, or a code that is not
associated to the specific site URL that they are self-registering from, the system will not allow
registration. A User that is self-registering at a site that requires an Approval Process will need
to get all steps of approval to register.
The Admin can use a WYSIWYG editor similar to cover pages to create a custom login page for
a site.
System Admin > Application Admin > Sites

Site ID EXT
Description External Users
Default Domain EXT
Default Organization EXT
Default Active Locale ID English
Default Currency ID USD
Default Time Zone America/New York
Registration Validation Registration Code
*Copy and paste above table to document additional Sites that are to be configured.

193
Notes

9.6 User Introduction


The User Introduction represents the first screen that is displayed to the user when they access
the User interface and is also referred to as the “News Page”. The Default User Introduction is
often modified to configure the introduction page for all Users. If Brands are in place, additional
User Introductions may be created to further modify the content displayed to unique User
populations. Note: If the DisplayNewsPageOnLogin element is set to “Never” in the
LMS_ADMIN configuration, users will never see this page. User Introductions support HTML
and may reference content that is web accessible.
System Admin > Application Admin > User Introductions

User
Data
Introduction
div style="padding:10px 10px 0px"> <span class="newsTitleText">How To
Get The Most Out Of The SuccessFactors TMS</span> <hr style="border:
1px solid #CCCCCC; height:2px"> <table border="0" cellspacing="0"
cellpadding="0" style='border-collapse:collapse;width:100%'> <tr> <td
colspan="4" height="10">&nbsp;</td> </tr> <tr> <td style="width:10%;
padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px;"> <img
src="<ResourcePath/>/images/todo_list.png" border="0" alt="To-Do List">
</td> <td style="width:40%; padding-top: 10px; padding-left:10px;padding-
DEFAULT_ right:15px;"> <span class="newsSectionTitle">Work From Your To-Do
List</span><br> <span class="newsBodyText">Your to-do items are
LEARNER conveniently listed in due date order, so that you can easily plan your
_INTRO work.</span> </td> <td style="width:10%; padding-top:10px; padding-
bottom:10px;"> <img src="<ResourcePath/>/images/status_pods.png"
border="0" alt="Status Pods"> <td style="width:40%;padding-top:
10px;padding-left:5px;padding-right:10px;"> <span
class="newsSectionTitle">Stay On Target</span><br> <span
class="newsBodyText">Review your Status Pods frequently.</span><br>
<span class="newsBodyText">Click on any pod to drill into details.</span>
</td>
-------------------------------truncated------------------------------

Notes

194
9.7 Date/Time Format Patterns
References already exist for date and time format patterns but more may be added if necessary.
The tables below contain all the existing patterns and is used to document need for additional
patterns. Date/Time Format Patterns are associated also with Locales, so Administrators and
Users may automatically have the patterns applied. Administrators may manually change their
preferences for each pattern.

9.7.1 Date Patterns


Date Pattern ID Example Description
System type date
M/d/yyyy 1/2/2008
pattern
System type date
MMM/d/yyyy JAN/2/2008
pattern
System type date
d/M/yyyy 2/1/2008
pattern
System type date
d/MMM/yyyy 2/JAN/2008
pattern
System type date
yyyy/M/d 2008/1/2
pattern
System type date
yyyy/MMM/d 2008/JAN/2
pattern

Notes

9.7.2 Time Patterns


Date Pattern ID Example Description
System type date
HH:mm:ss 14:30:15
pattern
System type date
hh:mm:aaa 02:30 PM
pattern
System type date
hh:mm:ss:aaa 02:30:15 PM
pattern

195
Notes

10. Tools
The Tools section allows System Administrators with the ability to manage certain aspects of
the application on an “as needed” basis. The following sections do not require configuration
decisions, but decisions should be made as to when these processes will be run, if ever, by
whom, and for what reason.
System Admin > Tools

10.1 Admin Passwords


The system administrator can click the button in this screen in order to force the expiration of all
administrator passwords. Expiring all passwords requires all administrators to create a new
password when they next log in. Administrators are asked to provide their old password for
verification, then create a new password. Passwords can also be managed from the Global
Variables under Password Settings.

Notes

10.2 Attachments Utilization


The attachment framework is used within the application to attach external documents to
Learning Events and Performance Reviews. The attachments utilization tool is used to gather
attachment statistics. The statistics displayed are up to, but not including, the date you entered.
If you click Purge, then the system removes all of the attachments from all associated records if
the files that were attached before, but not including, the date you entered.
Use the attachments utilization tool to gather more information to manage the attachments in
the system. Click Show Statistics to view the attachment statistics up to, but not including, the
date you entered, or the date already displayed in the date field. Some of these statistics (for
example, total attachment size allocated, and maximum size allowed per attachment) come
from a setting in the ATTACHMENT configuration ID (System Admin>Configuration>System
Configuration).Click Purge to remove all of the attachments from the associated records if the
files were attached before, but not including, the date you entered.
Note: If you plan to purge attachments, then we recommend that you check and double-
check your dates because you cannot undo a purge.

Notes

196
10.3 Direct Links
The Direct Link wizard builds links to specific pages in SuccessFactors Learning. You can send
the links to users so that they can access the pages by clicking the link. You can embed the
links in any environment that accepts URL links. Direct links do not compromise security. Users
will have access to only those sections of the application that their assigned workflow
restrictions allow. Users are asked to provide login information if they are not already logged in.
These links can be used with SSO.

Notes
An administrator can paste notification links into notification messages or paste the URL links
into an e-mail message or Web page.
Determine whether or not this functionality will be used for notifications.
If URL will be pasted into a web page or an email, you may want to consider adding the html
coding that will provide the user with a simply view, such as Click Here to Access.

10.4 Label Import/Export


You can use the Label Import/Export wizard in the following situations, for example:

 To export labels from a staging environment to import them into a production


environment.
 To export labels that need to be edited, then import the changes back into the
application.
 To import labels changed or added for new reports designed in SuccessFactors Report
Designer.

Notes
In section 12.3, admins can capture label changes, but it is recommended that you keep a
copy of the original label file, should you need to resort to it at a later time.
Determine when or if you will import the label file and where it will be stored for future
reference.
Determine who should be responsible for tracking label changes and who should be allowed
to import and export.
Keep in mind that an administrator can edit a label in the application without exporting the
label file.

10.5 Learning Event Synchronization


Run the Learning Event Synchronization background job if you added learning events or
learning plan records without using Talent Management (for example, if you ran a SQL
statement against the database). It synchronizes the learning events with related records in the
database.

197
Notes
Determine if there is a need at your organization for this tool to be run, by whom, and how
often.
It may be possible that you will not have a need for this tool.

10.6 Import Data


The following records can be imported into SuccessFactors Administration using this tool:

 User
 Instructor
 Learning History
 Government Reporting
 Organization Budget
 References
 Registrations
 Admin Roles
 Task
 Site Registration Code
 Learning Assignment
 Curriculum Assignment
 Quiz
 Questions (Library-type)
Because each record type must include certain data and all data must be in a specific order,
you must start the process by selecting the Download Template option, which allows you to
save a copy of a correctly designed Excel workbook. After you download the template and
insert your data, you can import that data from the Excel workbook into SuccessFactors
Administration.

The Learning Assignment option allows administrators to assign free-floating items via the
Import Tool. The latest active revision is considered for the assignment. The Assignment date
is defaulted to the date of import. The Excel template can optionally include Names of the
employees to make it easier to work with the Excel, but they are not processed during the
import.
To import question images , a zip file that includes the data in a spreadsheet and all images in a
folder entitled images. If no images are being imported, then only the data spreadsheet is
required.

198
As part of the improved performance, in 1711 Admins can no longer add and update a record in
the same import file. For example, you cannot add a user with ID jdoe and first name John and
then, in the same import file, update jdoe to have the first name Jane.
Note: We recommend that you review the comments that are associated with every column
header for each worksheet so that you know which data is required and in what format that data
must be. When uploading Reference Data due to the number of tabs in the template it is
recommended to load several files rather than one so that errors may be more easily identified
in smaller data sets.
Reference importing is a great tool to help with initial system configuration. As with all imported
data the Reference Values should be reviewed in the Application following import.

Notes

10.7 Export Data


Quiz data, Question (library-type), and administrator roles can be exported via the Export Data
Tool. This tool is designed to be used in conjunction with the Import Data Tool process, and the
template layout matches in both tools.

This can be used to extract the admin roles for update and re-import into the same environment,
or as a method of exporting tested admin role configurations from a lower environment for
promotion to the production environment. The Admin can select one or more admin roles to
export and schedule the export background job. When the Export completes, the “Download”
link will appear, and the admin can then download their results. Export results will expire after
the number of threshold days after execution has passed (Default is 3 – configuration in
LMS_ADMIN).

199
Notes

10.8 AICC Import


Use the legacy AICC importer if you have AICC files that you need to import. The Legacy AICC
Import tool performs a level 1-compliant import of an AICC (Airline Industry CBT Committee)
course. The Legacy AICC import is superseded by the universal content importer: (Content
>Tools > Content Import).

Notes

10.9 Legacy SCORM Import


Administrators can import SCORM files using the SCORM import assistant for a level 1 import.
This legacy tool is for a single item and supports both SCORM 1.2 and SCORM 2004. If an
administrator needs to do a bulk upload of SCORM content, the other SCORM import tool
(Content > Tools > Import Content) can be used.

Notes

10.10 Download Connector Template (1611)


Administrators can download the latest connector template(s) for any connector (“all columns”
option). If custom columns beyond the standard number (for each entity – i.e. 15 for users) have
been configured, they will be included in the template as well. Administrators can also choose
to download connector template(s) for any connector that contains just columns that have been
mapped (per the connector.properties file configurations). This option (“only mapped columns”)
applies only when header-based processing is enabled.

200
Note: The templates for the SF User Connector and the SF Competency Connector, this tool
provides only a sample template. The BizX system is the source for these configurations and
an export should be generated from BizX Provisioning to obtain a template that reflects the
customer specific configurations.

Notes

10.11 Manage Unsent Email


To ensure there are no queued emails or remove any queued emails before enabling email
notifications you no longer need to contact customer support.
If you realize an issue that resulted in erroneous email generation, in addition to disabling email
while the issue is corrected, you can now remove erroneous email before re-enabling email.
Admins with “Manage Unsent Emails” workflow can view the count and date range for unsent
email and can delete unsent email.

Deleting unsent email creates a background job that will run immediately as long as the job to
send email is not running.
The email audit report which represents all notifications that the system generated will still
contain deleted unsent email, so the audit trail remains.
Related Workflows
Admin Workflows:
 Manage Unsent Emails

201
11. Automatic Process Settings
Automatic Process Modules (APMs) are scheduled jobs used to handle system email
notifications, clean up processes, and update User assignments. Depending upon the
SuccessFactors features being utilized, some APMs need not be scheduled. Listed below are
APMs associated with SuccessFactors Learning. The email address identified in each of these
processes is the recipient email for the log file that is generated each time the process runs.
APM Sequencing: There are no dependencies between Automatic Processes, so they may be
sequenced to run according to need. However, it is wise to schedule the Assignment Profile
Synchronization APM to run before any other APM to ensure training assignments are updated
first. This is especially important if an HR connector is updating User records. E.g., HR
Connector runs nightly at 1 am – Assignment Profile Synchronization should run nightly at 2 am
to process all the new and modified User records and make appropriate training assignments /
un-assignments before other APMs run.
System Admin > Automatic Processes

11.1 Assignment Profile Synchronization


This process reconciles changes in the attributes of Users and/or the Assignment Profiles with
which they are associated. For example, if new Users are added to SuccessFactors via an HR
interface, this process runs to assign or remove the Curricula, Role, and/or Catalog access
assigned to any Assignment Profiles that the new records match or no longer match.
Assignment Profile Synchronization APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: Suggestion: American/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.2 Attachment Quota Watch Notification


This process sends a notification, using the ‘ApmAttachmentQuotaWatch’ notification template,
to an administrator when the system approaches a threshold limit which is a percentage of the
maximum that is set in the ATTACHMENT configuration file.
202
Attachment Quota Watch Notification APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: Suggestion: American/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Utilization Threshold: (%) 75

Notes

11.3 Catalog Price Update


This automatic process monitors and periodically notifies the designated Administrator of
catalog price changes according to the interval set. The APM is intended to aid in tracking
catalog price changes.
Catalog Price Update APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

203
11.4 Clean up Approval Processes
When business processes (Approval Processes) are withdrawn or cancelled the process
remains on the User’s record as an active business process. This APM will remove the
withdrawn or cancelled processes.
Clean up Approval Processes APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.5 Clean up Background Jobs


This process cycles through all of the background and recurring report jobs in the database. If
any of the report jobs have been scheduled for longer than or equal to the number of days
specified by the Threshold attribute, then the system retains the report job but removes the
report from the database. If the system finds a report job that is not scheduled to execute in the
future, then the clean-up background jobs automatic process also removes background job.

Clean up Background Jobs APM


Threshold: 90

Notes
This process is scheduled by LMS System automatically

11.6 Clean up Background Reports


This process cycles through all of the background and recurring report jobs in the database. If
any of the report jobs have been scheduled for longer than or equal to the number of days in the
‘asyncStorageTTLDays’ property in the REPORT_SYSTEM configuration file (System Admin >
Configuration > System Configuration), then the system retains the report job but removes the
generated report from the database.

204
Notes
This process is scheduled by LMS System automatically

11.7 Clean up Overdue Item Evaluations


This process removes optional overdue surveys (both item evaluation and feedback) from the
learning plan. Surveys that are ‘in progress’ will not be removed.
Clean up Overdue Item Evaluations APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.8 Coupon Expiration Notification


This process cycles through all of the coupon records, looking for coupon records whose ‘Valid
To’ date falls within the option that you select in the ‘Expiration Notification Threshold’ area (the
system calculates date differences based on calendar days; the system includes all weekends
and holidays, even if you have created holiday profiles). When the system finds a coupon that is
about to expire, it sends an email notification, using the ‘ApmCouponExpiry’ notification
template, to the person whose email address is saved in the ‘Owner Email’ box on the Summary
tab (Commerce > Coupons > Summary tab) of the expiring coupon record.

Coupon Expiration Notification APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N

205
Coupon Expiration Notification APM
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Expiration Notification Threshold Options: Two Weeks/One Week/One Day

Notes

11.9 Curriculum/Program Clean-up


Curriculum/Program Clean Up removes the relationship between an earlier revision of a
learning item and the related curriculum or program. When Curriculum/Program Clean Up finds
the following conditions, it removes the earlier reversion of the learning item:

 Two or more revisions of a learning item are related to the same curriculum/program or
free-floating learning item
 The two or more revisions of the learning item are both effective (have an effective date
before today's date)

Note: When and Item that is contained in Curricula is revised and the Curriculum update options
are selected, both the old and new revisions of the Item reside in the Curriculum until this
process runs. It is best practice for all Administrators to schedule the revision job to run
overnight before this job to ensure Users never see duplicate Items on their Learning Plans or
Curriculum Status pages.
Curriculum Clean-up Notification APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York

206
Curriculum Clean-up Notification APM
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Include Free-Floating Items
Y/N
Assignment

Notes

11.10 Deny Expired Approval Processes


This process denies any pending registration or external learning type approval processes if the
start date for the registration or external learning has passed. If this process is not scheduled,
Users could potentially have approval processes pending for offerings that have already been
delivered.
Deny Expired Approval Processes APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.11 Evaluation Synchronization


The Evaluation Synchronization automatic process performs two tasks: it sends survey
assignment notifications for both Item Evaluations and Follow-up Evaluations and assigns
Follow-up Evaluations to Users and their supervisors based on the assignment period
configured for the Item. This automatic process uses the ‘ItemEvaluationAssignmentNotification’
notification template to send Item Evaluation email notifications to the affected users and uses
the ‘FollowupEvaluationAssignmentNotification’ notification template to send email notification to
Follow-up Evaluation participants.

207
Evaluation Synchronization APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address:

Notes

11.12 Employee Enrollment Digest


Admin can now schedule an Automatic Process (Employee Enrollment Digest) to send a
periodic digest of enrollments to the supervisors using a new notification template
“ApmEmployeeEnrollmentDigest”. This notification is independent of the existing notifications.
Employee Enrollment Digest APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@West-Ward.com

Notes

208
11.13 External Verification Reminder
This process is for SF-182 customers only. Configure the APM if using SF-182.

External Verification Reminder APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Automatic Process Job Settings
Maximum Notifications:
Reminder Period:

Notes

11.14 Jam Groups Notification


The Jam groups notification automatic process uses the ‘JamGroupInvitation’ notification
template to send notifications when an administrator sets one of the available invitation settings
while associating an item with a Jam group (Learning > Items > Jam Groups tab) participants.
Item Jam Groups Notification APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York

209
Item Jam Groups Notification APM
Email Address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.15 Item Request Clean-up


Entries from the item request list will be removed automatically when one of the following events
occurs;
1.) A User enrolls in the requested item or Admin enrolls the User into the requested item
2.) An Admin or User removes the request
3.) Learning event recorded that is a later completion date than the requested date
However, some item requests may still remain in the system. This Item Request Clean-up
automatic process is intended to purge item requests identified by an Admin as no longer valid.
It will purge all item requests that are older than the number of days listed in the Threshold box.
For example, if ‘365’ is listed in the Threshold box, then the system purges all requests that
were made more than 365 days ago.
Item Request Clean-up APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Threshold: 365

Notes

210
11.16 Item Scheduling Demand
When Users choose to ‘Request Schedule’ for an instructor led or blended Item on their
Learning Plan or in a Catalog, the User is added to the queue of Item Requests. When the
number of requests matches the Minimum Registration on the Deliver Data tab of the Item, this
process notifies the contact email specified on the Design Data tab of the Item. If Users are
enrolled in a Scheduled Offering of the Item, they are removed from the request list. Triggers
‘ApmComponentRequest’ notification template.
Item Scheduling Demand APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Weekly Day:
Schedule Frequency:
Monthly Date:

12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Reminder Period: 15

Notes

11.17 Learning Expiration


This process sends email notifications to Users and their Supervisors when assigned Items are
approaching the Required By Date. They will continue to receive the notifications according to
the Reminder Period until the Item is complete or unassigned. Select the recipients for this
email as user, supervisor or both. Triggers ‘ApmTrainingExpiration’ notification template.
Note: The recipients set in this global APM can be set differently at the item level.
Learning Expiration APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Schedule Frequency: Daily

211
Learning Expiration APM
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Notification Defaults
Email Recipients: User: Yes/No Supervisor: Yes/No
Overdue Learning Notification:
This enables a separate email Yes/No
template for overdue items.
Threshold: 30 Days
Reminder Period (determines the
interval, in days, between
notification messages to Users
regarding their need to complete
expiring items. For example, if the
15
value in Threshold is set to 30 and
the Reminder Period is set to 7,
then a User will receive 4 email
messages before the Item expires,
and 1 per week after it expires.)
Time Zone: America/New York

Notes

11.18 Learning Plan Notification


This process notifies Users when Items are added to, removed from or modified on their
Learning Plan since the last time the process ran. This process also notifies supervisors of
learning events (for credit or not for credit) that have been recorded for Users since the last time
the process ran. Note: User Learning Plan notification receipt is variable depending on settings
configured in section 9.2.18. Triggers ApmStudentLearningPlanNotification and
ApmSupervisorLearningPlanNotification Notification Templates.
Learning Plan Notification APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N

212
Learning Plan Notification APM
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York

Notes

11.19 Native User Deletion


Configure a process to delete SAP SuccessFactors Learning users who are outside the DRM
system to set up your data privacy system.
Native User Deletion APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Delete Criteria & Threshold
Users: __ Related Instructors: __ Related Admins: __
Delete Record Types:
Instructors: ___
Delete external users and
instructors who have been inactive Y/N # of Days: ___
for the specified number of days: 
Delete internal users who have
been terminated for the specified Y/N # of Days: ___
number of days: 

213
Notes
Do not enable this process if you have user records that populate from the SAP
SuccessFactors platform. These users are already managed from within the platform and
this process can potentially delete these users. User deletion is permanent, and the records
cannot be restored.

11.20 Native User Data Retention


This process allows admins to schedule a job to purge user data, based on a configured
retention policy. This purge applies only to native users (internal and external). Purge is
permanent, and once data is purged, it cannot be recovered.
Native User Data Retention APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Purge Criteria
Purge user data older than the
#: ____ Years or Days:
specified retention period:
Users excluded from Purge
#:____
(maximum of 100)
User Status: Active, Not Active, Both
User Country: Select one or more
to restrict by country
Data Objects Purged
User Personal Information Yes or No
Learning Activity Yes or No

214
Notes

11.21 Open Content Network Content Synchronization


This process initiates the import and synchronization of the content libraries of the OCN
partners. This APM must run first to allow admins to search for and select the OCN partner
courses for import into the LMS as External-Course items.
Open Content Network Content Synchronization APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email Address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.22 Power Search Synchronization


SuccessFactors created multiple tables so that localized data could be managed more
efficiently. When you edit data for a record type that supports data localization, the system does
not automatically synchronize the multiple database tables. Therefore, we recommend that you
run the Power Search Synchronization automatic process to occur at least daily if not in minutes
to synchronize the records in the database tables that support data localization. If you do not
schedule this process, then your full-text search results will not return records that should be
included for a search; thus, the results of a full-text search become increasingly unreliable over
time. This process is applicable regardless of the number of language packs.

Power Search Synchronization APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Schedule Frequency: Minutely Every # of Minutes:
Hourly Every # of Hours:

215
Power Search Synchronization APM
Daily
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York

Notes

11.23 Power Search Optimization


To make full text searching more efficient, SuccessFactors created full-text search indexes for
many record types (for example, users, items, curricula, and so on). Each time you add a record
or change part of a record (for example, the title of an item), the system updates the full-text
search however, the system does not automatically update full-text search indexes. Therefore,
we recommend that you schedule the Power Search Optimization automatic process. If you do
not schedule this process, then full text searches will execute progressively slower over time.

Power Search Optimization APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York

Notes

11.24 Purchase Order Low Balance Notification


This process sends out notifications to those listed in the ‘Balance Notification Email(s)’ on a
Purchase Order record where the balance has reached below the amount specified in the ‘Low
Balance Notification Threshold’ field.
Purchase Order Low Balance Notification APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N

216
Purchase Order Low Balance Notification APM
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York

Notes

11.25 Purge Deleted User Audit History (1708)


DO NOT USE IN BIZX INTEGRATED ENVIRONMENTS
Please review this link for further details
The LMS captures audit information on users (i.e. changes to the user record, changes to
learning history, etc.). Deleting the user removes the user from the UI so that administrators
may no longer search for the user. However, the audit information remains in the LMS. This
process enables clients to remove the audit data associated to deleted users. The APM will
purge audit data for user that have been deleted for longer than the specified number of days.
Setting the threshold to ‘0’ means that the APM will purge audit history for any deleted users in
the run. As of 1708, this APM will affect users, admin users and instructor users.
Purge Deleted User Audit History APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Purge deleted users’ audit data
Must be between 0 and 90
after the specified number of days:

217
Notes

11.26 Purge Expired Catalog Items


This process removes items from catalogs if the item catalog expiration is in the past. The APM
also notifies the Item contact (Design Data tab) the Item is about to expire from Catalog(s)
based upon the pre-expiration notification threshold. The contact email is notified according to
the Pre-expiration Notification Threshold.
Purge Expired Catalog Items APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Pre-expiration Notification
7
Threshold:

Notes

11.27 Refresh Org Dashboard Data


The organization dashboard uses temporarily saved data because some data is based on
complex calculations that would take a long time to generate each time a User accesses the
organization dashboard. The Refresh Org Dashboard Data automatic process is intended to set
the periodicity for refreshing the saved data utilized by the organization dashboard in the User
interface.
Refresh Org Dashboard Data APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Schedule Frequency: Daily

218
Refresh Org Dashboard Data APM
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:

12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: lmsadmin@plateau.com

Notes

11.28 Reset Online Item


This process finds all online items that were initially launched more than the number of days
specified at the Item Online Settings tab level and resets Users online status, forcing them to re-
launch and complete all content to complete the Item.
Reset Online Item APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.29 Waitlist to Request List


This process finds all Scheduled Offerings that have a start date/time in the past and adds any
Users who remain registered with a Waitlist status to the Request List of the Item. Their
registration status of Waitlist does not change for historical record keeping purposes.

219
Waitlist to Request List APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.30 Scheduled Offering Delivery


This process sends e-mail "Registration Reminders" to Users (and their supervisors) who are
enrolled in upcoming Scheduled Offerings. This is a one-time email reminder and is sent to all
Users registered with an Enrolled status within the specified date threshold. Triggers
ApmInstanceDelivery Notification Template.
Scheduled Offering Delivery APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Weekly Day:
Schedule Frequency:
Monthly Date:

12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email Recipients: User: Yes/No Supervisor: Yes/No
Threshold (An offering is included
in this process if its scheduled start
date is within the number of 15 days
calendar days you specify in the
Threshold field):

220
Notes

11.31 Subscription Expiration Notification


This process cycles through all of the subscription records, looking for those that are about to
expire based on the ‘Subscription Period’ and ‘Period Number’ on the Subscription record.
When the system finds a subscription that is about to expire, it sends an email notification, using
the ‘ApmSubscriptionExpiry’ notification template, to the person whose email address is saved
in the ‘Owner Email’ box on the Summary tab (Commerce > Subscriptions > Summary area) of
the expiring subscription record.
Subscription Expiration Notification APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Send notification to Subscription
Options: Two Months/One Month/One Week
Owner prior to expiration date:

Notes

11.32 User Requested Scheduled Offering Notification


When administrators add a scheduled offering for a course that users have requested, the User
Requested Scheduled Offering Notification Automatic Process Manager (APM) notifies users
that their request has been met. When the User Requested Scheduled Offering Notification
APM runs, it looks for:

 New learning offerings that have been added to the catalogs of users who have made
requests.
 The start date of the offerings that have been added: are they before the need by date of
the request. The need by date is the date that the user needs to take the course: it is the
user's deadline. So, the APM looks to see if the offering helps users meet their deadline.
 The offerings are in the users' geographic regions. Some companies do not use regions.
If the user does not have a region, the APM skips this step. The APM looks for regions

221
so that the offering is close to the user. Users submit requests because they do not have
travel budget and so they need an offering that meets their deadline in their region.

When a user with a request has offerings that meet the criteria, the APM sends them an email.
The email includes the course name (learning item title), it includes the details of the offering,
and it provides a link to register for the offering.

Subscription Expiration Notification APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.33 Recommendations Newsletter


The Recommendations Newsletter is a list of recommended courses that users receive as email
messages. In SAP SuccessFactors Learning, users can make recommendations to their peers.
For example, if they finished a course and it was very helpful to them, they can recommend it to
peers. The Recommendations Newsletter compiles the recommendations for a user, but does
not make the recommendations.

Subscription Expiration Notification APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York

222
Subscription Expiration Notification APM
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Notification Interval 0-1000

Notes

11.34 Program Enrollment/Withdrawal


System administrators set up the Program Enrollment/Withdrawal Automatic Process Manager
(APM) to take advantage of the VLS auto-enrollment for learning programs. When an
assignment profile assigns users to a scheduled offering, users are automatically enrolled in the
course. When the scheduled offering is part of a learning program, and when the scheduled
offering has a segment conducted over VLS, the VLS portion of enrollment is offloaded to the
programs VLS enrollment process. If an assignment profile withdraws users from programs
with scheduled offerings, the VLS portion of the withdraw is also handled by this APM. The user
is unenrolled by the assignment profile but remains a participant in the VLS segment until
Program Enrollment/Withdrawal runs.

Subscription Expiration Notification APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

11.35 Set Instructor Base Cost


The Set Instructor Base Cost automatic process runs at an interval to calculate the cost for an
instructor so that it can be used in training planner applications. The Set Instructor Base Cost
automatic process can be scheduled to set the default Instructor base cost to the government

223
Reporting hourly or adjusted hourly rate in the same currency. Any existing instructor base cost
of the same currency will be overwritten. If the government reporting value is blank, it will be set
to zero.

Subscription Expiration Notification APM


Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily

Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:


Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Set Instructor Base Cost From (Hourly Rate)/(Adjusted
Automatic Process Job Settings
Hourly Rate)

Notes

11.36 Set Account Request Approval Process


This process associate users with account request approval processes so that users get their
correct approval processes.
Set Account Request Approval Process APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Hourly Every # of Hours:
Daily
Schedule Frequency:
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

224
Notes

11.37 User-Created Account Reminder


This process sends user-created account reminders so that users who have requested
accounts can receive the results of their requests
User-Created Account Reminder APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Daily
Schedule Frequency: Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com
Notification Defaults
Maximum notification: 4
Reminder period: 7

Notes

11.38 VLS Attendance Processing


This process records Item completion for Users who were enrolled in Scheduled Offerings
delivered virtually if they met the required percentage of participation specified at the Offering
level. Note: this auto-recording requires a VLS integration and does not apply to Scheduled
Offerings delivered with an online collaboration tool that is not integrated with SuccessFactors
Learning.
VLS Attendance Processing APM
Schedule This Process: Options: Y/N
Schedule Frequency: Hourly Every # of Hours:

225
VLS Attendance Processing APM
Daily
Weekly Day:
Monthly Date:
12 - 5 AM Maintenance Timeslot
Time of Day:
(sequenced with other APMs)
Time Zone: America/New York
Schedule End Date Threshold:
When APM runs, processes the
attendances for the VLS offerings
which have ended. Select the Options: 10/20/30
offerings that are within ‘X’ days
from the end date of the Scheduled
Offering.
Email address: ADMIN@<Customer Name>.com

Notes

12. Interface Modification


12.1 User Interface
For integrated environments the BizX Theming Tool may be used with preset Branding options
and the ability to configure the colors of specific styles by picking colors through the UI. Please
refer to your Foundation documentation for theming information.

12.2 Locales
All language packs are now available to customers and can be turned on or off by customer
administrators. Locales may be added at References> Geography > Locales.

Active Description Use By Currency ID


Locale ID (Admin/Both/User)

226
Notes

12.3 Labels
Label values may be modified throughout the User and Admin interfaces to accommodate
necessary terminology changes. Labels may be identified and modified at References>
Geography > Labels. Search for the label by its ‘Label Value’ or ‘Label ID’ and edit the values
on the Locale tab of the label to make changes. The number of Locales is determined by
licensed Language Packs. To do a larger find/replace of label values, it is possible to export
labels as text from System Admin > Tools > Label Import/Export. Make the modifications in a
text editor and re-import the labels. Label modifications should be made with caution, some
labels contain code to display DB values when rendered on a page. When contacting support
please be aware of the original labels. As new functionality is introduced label modification may
need to be reviewed. Ensure all label changes are recorded here or as a label properties file
used by the label import export tool.
Below are required label changes captured during the Learning Configuration Workshop:
New Locale
Label ID Locale Locale Value
Value
data.menu.MyEmployee
English My Employees My Team
s
User Easy Link
data.menu.EasyLink1 English Company Policy
1

Notes

13. Advanced System Configuration


13.1 Notification Templates
Notification templates define emails delivered to Users, Instructors, Contacts, Supervisors and
administrators for various triggers. For all system generated email notifications, there is a
template which may be modified. Some notification templates are associated with APMs
(Section Error: Reference source not found. As part of a sound rollout strategy, each notification
template that will be in use during the implementation should be reviewed and possibly edited.
Users’ first introduction to the SuccessFactors Learning Management System often is delivered
in the form of an email notification.
227
The list below does not include the notifications sent out for the legacy performance and
compensation modules as they will be deprecated. This section does not contain the actual
syntax of the global notification templates. They can be reviewed directly in the system by
navigating to System Admin > Configuration > Notification Syntax as needed.

13.1.1 Template List


System Admin > Configuration > Notification Templates

Template ID Description Trigger Recipient


Assignment to
Alternate
AlternateSub Supervisor
ordinateNotif Notification E- A user has been assigned
ication mail Template an alternate supervisor User
Alternate
Supervisor
Assignment of
Employees
AlternateSup Rollup A user has been assigned
ervisorNotific Notification E- as an alternate supervisor
ation mail Template for another user Alternate Supervisor
When the combined size of
the attachments in the
ApmAttachm Attachment system equals or exceeds
entQuotaWa Quota Watch the percentage in the
tch Notification Utilization Threshold box APM email address
APM Item
Request Contact email at Item
ApmCompo Notification Email Item Scheduling Demand record level; APM email
nentRequest Template APM address
APM Coupon
Expiration
ApmCoupon Notification Email
Expiry Template Coupon Expiry APM APM email address

APM Offering
Delivery
ApmInstanc Notification Email Scheduled Offering Delivery Users, Supervisors, APM
eDelivery Template APM email address
ApmPurchas APM Purchase Purchase Order Low APM APM email address
eOrderLowB Order Low
alance Balance Email

228
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
Template
APM Curriculum
ApmQualific Clean Up
ationCleanu Notification Email
p Template Curriculum Cleanup APM APM email address
ApmRecom APM
mendations Recommendation Recommendations
Newsletter s Newsletter Newsletter APM User
APM Reset
ApmResetO Online Items
nlineCompo Notification Email
nents Template Reset Online Item APM APM email address
ApmStudent Notify Learner of Users (Learning Plan
LearningPla Learning Plan Learning Plan Notification Changes), APM email
nNotification changes APM address
APM Subscription
Expiration
ApmSubscri Notification Email
ptionExpiry Template Subscriptioin Expiry APM User
ApmSupervi
sorLearning Notify Supervisor Supervisors (User Item
PlanNotificat of Learning Plan Learning Plan Notification Completion), APM email
ion changes APM address
ApmSynchro
nizeStudent
ChangesAss APM Assignment
ignmentProfi Profile Assignment Profile
le Synchronization Synchronization APM APM email address
APM Learning
Expiration
ApmTraining Notification Email Users and supervisors,
Expiration Template Learning Expiration APM APM email address
APM Learning
Overdue
ApmTraining Notification Email Users and supervisors,
Overdue Template Learning Expiration APM APM email address
APM Update
ApmUpdate Catalog Price
CatalogPrice Email Template Catalog Price Update APM APM email address

229
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
Notify User
ApmUserRe Requested
questedSON Schedule User Requested Offering
otification Offering Email Notification APM User
APM VLS
Attendance
ApmVlsAtten Processing
danceProce Notification Email VLS Attendance Processing
ssing Template APM APM email address
APM Waitlist to
Request List
ApmWaitlist Notification Email Waitlist to Request List
Request Template APM Users, APM email address
ApprovalPro Notify learner of
cessApprova progress in Approval Process new step
lProgressed approval status reached User
ApprovalPro
cessApprova Notify approver of
lRequired action required Approval Process initiated Requested approver
ApprovalPro Notify Learner of
cessApprova withdrawn
lWithdrawn request Approval request withdrawn User
ApprovalPro Confirmation of
cessInitialRe Learner request
quest submission Approval process initiated User
ApprovalPro
cessRequest Notify Learner of
Approved approved request Approval granted User
ApprovalPro
cessRequest Notify Learner of
Denied denied request Approval denied User
ApprovalPro
cessRequest Notify Learner of
Expired expired request Approval Process Expired User
Background Email Notification
JobNotificati Template for Background Job email
on background jobs Background Job Complete (Admin entered)
Background Email Notification Background Report Job Background Report Job
ReportJobN Template for
230
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
Background
otification Report Jobs Complete email (Admin entered)
Email Notification
CERTIFICA for Sending
TE_OF_CO Certificate of Learning Event Recorded ?
MPLETION Completion Admin email Certificate User
Content
ContentDepl Deployment
oymentNotifi Notification Email
cation Template Content Deployment Admin
A user has been selected
Delegatee Delegatee Email by another user as a
Email Notification delegate User
Delegation Notification sent to user
DelegationA Assignment when supervisor selects
ssignment Notification user as a delegate User
ESigPinExpi Notification for
redNotificati Expired ESIG
on PIN E-sig Expiration User
ESigPinFaile Notification for E-sig Verification E-sig Admin email (Sys
dNotification ESIG PIN Failure Unsuccessful Admin > Global Variables)
Registration Slot
EnrollmentSl Cancellation
otCancellatio Notification Email Slots removed from
n Template Scheduled Offering Organization email
Registration Slot
Change
EnrollmentSl Confirmation
otChangeCo Notification Email Slots changed on
nfirmation Template Scheduled Offering Organization email
Registration Slot
EnrollmentSl Confirmation
otConfirmati Notification Email Slots created for Scheduled
on Template Offering Organization email
Email Notification
ExpiredCatal Template for
ogItemsNotif Expiration of Purge Expired Catalog Item Contact email, APM
ication catalog items Items APM email address
ExternalLear Notify approver of External Learning Request Approver
231
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
action required
ningRequest regarding an
ApprovalReq external training
uired request Approval Required
Notify approver of
action required
ExternalLear regarding a
ningRequest verification of
VerificationR external training External Learning Request
equired request Verification Approver
Email Notification
Template for
ExternalLink External Link
Recommend Recommendation External Link
ations s to Users Recommendation User
ExternalVerif External
icationRemin Verification Reminders for SF-182
der Reminder forms that need verification User
Questionnaire
Survey
FollowupEva Assignment Learning Event is recorded
luationAssig Notification for an item with a Follow-up User (if set at the item
nmentNotific RollUp Email Evaluation and the Follow- level), Supervisor (if set at
ation Template up Evaluation APM runs. the item level)
Notify Instructors
InstructorAs when a new
signmentNot offering is
ification assigned Instructor Assignment User
Questionnaire
Survey
ItemEvaluati Assignment Learning Event is recorded
onAssignme Notification Email for an item with an Item
ntNotification Template Evaluation associated. User
Jam Group
Invitation
JamGroupIn Notification Email
vitation Template Jam Group Invitation User
Email Notification
ObserverNot
Template for
ification Observation requested User (who is Observer)
requesting

232
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
observers
Password
PasswordNo Notification Email
tification Template User request Password User
PreExpiratio Email Notification
nNotification Template for Pre
ForCatalogIt Expiration of Purge Expired Catalog Item Contact email, APM
ems catalog items Items APM email address

ReassignStu
dentCompon Reassign student
entNotificatio component
n notification User reassigned Item User
Email Notification
RecurringRe Template for
portJobNotifi Recurring Report Admin creates recurring Recurring Report Job email
cation Jobs report Job address
Self Registration
SELF_REGI Admin Admin Notification email
STRATION_ Notification User creates own User (System Admin > Global
ADMIN Template account Variables > Mail Settings)
Self Registration
SELF_REGI Learner
STRATION_ Notification User Creates own User
STUDENT Template account User
User, Supervisor,
Instructor, Contacts,
*Admin/Supervisor may
SystemEnrol System User self-registers or choose recipient groups. All
lmentNotifica Registration Admin/Supervisor registers are notified if User self-
tion Notification User in Scheduled Offering registers.
SystemPend System Pending User self-registers in
ingEnrollme Registration Scheduled Offering with User, Supervisor,
ntNotification Notification Approval Process Instructor, Contacts
System
SystemSche Scheduled User, Supervisor,
duleCancella Offering Instructor, Contacts,
tionNotificati Cancellation Scheduled Offering *Admin chooses recipient
on Notification cancellation groups

233
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
User, Supervisor,
Instructor, Contacts,
SystemUnen System User withdraws or Admin *Admin chooses recipient
rollmentNotif Unregistration withdraws User from groups, All are notified if
ication Notification Scheduled Offering User self-withdraws.
User, Supervisor,
Instructor, Contacts,
User registers or Admin *Admin chooses recipient
SystemWaitli System Waitlist registers User with Waitlist groups, All are notified if
stNotification Notification status User self-registers
User, Supervisor,
Instructor, Contacts,
*Admin chooses recipient
SystemWaitli System Waitlist Admin removes waitlisted groups, All are notified if
stRemovalN Removal user from scheduled User automatically enrolled
otification Notification offering registration list. via auto-fill.
Supervisor
TrainingNee Receives
dsMakeAssi Notification to
gnmentNotifi Make
cationToSup Assignments Supervisor Receives
ervisor Email Template Notification User
Training Needs
Modified by
TrainingNee Supervisor
dsModifiedB Notification Email Training Needs Modified by
ySupervisor Template Supervisor Approver
Training Needs
Rejected by Org
TrainingNee Owner
dsRejectedB Notification Email raining Needs Rejected by
yOrgOwner Template Org Owner User
Training Needs
Rejected by Org
TrainingNee Owner for
dsRejectedB Supervisor
yOrgOwnerF Notification Email Training Needs Rejected by
orSupervisor Template Org Owner User
TrainingNee Training Needs Training Needs Rejected by User
dsRejectedB Rejected by Supervisor
ySupervisor Supervisor
234
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
Notification Email
Template
Training Needs
TrainingNee Requested
dsRequeste Notification Email
d Template Training Needs Requested User
UserCreated
AccountAppr
ovalRequire Notify Approver User Created Account
d of action required Approval Approver
UserCreated Notify User about
AccountAppr self registration User Created Account
oved account approval Approval User
UserCreated Notify User about
AccountDeni self registration User Created Account
ed account denial Approval user
APM User
UserCreated Created Account
AccountRem Reminder to User Created Account
inder approver Approval Approver
Email Notification
Template for
UserHistory User History
Purge Purge APM User History Purge APM Admin
UserRecord
edCompletio
Notification
nApprovalPr
templates for
ocessReque
Approved
stApproved
notifications sent User Recorded Completion
to users Approval Process User
serRecorded Notification
CompletionA templates for
pprovalProc Denied
essRequest notifications sent User Recorded Completion
Denied to users Approval Process User
serRecorded Notification User Recorded Completion Approver
CompletionA template for Approval Process
pprovalProc Approval required
essApproval notification to

235
Template ID Description Trigger Recipient
Require supervisor
VLE Registration Users are enrolled in
VLE_ENRO Notification Email Scheduled Offering with
LLMENT Template VLS component. Users
VLE Event
Creation
VLE_EVENT Notification Email Scheduled offering segment
_CREATION Template has VLS server applied to it. Instructor
VLE Event
Deletion Scheduled offering segment
VLE_EVENT Notification Email has VLS server value
_DELETION Template removed. Instructor
VLE Event
Update Scheduled offering segment
VLE_EVENT Notification Email has VLS time frames
_UPDATE Template modified. Instructor
VLE Event
VLE_EVENT Update Learner Scheduled offering segment
_UPDATE_ Notification Email has VLS time frames
STUDENTS Template modified. User
VLE
Unregistration Users are un-enrolled in
VLE_UNEN Notification Email Scheduled Offering with
ROLLMENT Template VLS component. User

13.1.2 Editing Notification Templates


Notification templates consist of labels and syntax tags, and while they are not formatted with
HTML out-of-box, administrators may use HTML to format system emails, add links, images and
more. Labels may be easily modified if the goal is to change the wording of system emails.
Considerations must be made when modifying labels with multiple language values (language
packs), as the additional languages are not automatically updated and may require additional
translation services (this is not a SuccessFactors service). Labels used in a specific template
can be easily viewed and edited directly in the notification template itself.

236
Syntax tags call the SuccessFactors database for information, such as User names, item titles,
scheduled offering segment information, etc. There is a limited set of syntax tags that may be
included in notifications by group. Administrators may create new syntax tags in
SuccessFactors Learning but cannot add them to existing notification templates. This
functionality exists to support customization of email templates. Syntax tags for a specific
template can be easily viewed directly in the notification template itself.
Administrators can preview the run-time notification by clicking the Preview button (including
HTML formatting). The preview does not contain dynamic content, so administrators see syntax
tags. At run time, the syntax tags are replaced with dynamic content.
Notes

13.1.2.1 Notification Template Editor


The Notification Template Editor enables advanced capabilities to template editing including
customization for each locale independently without using a label-based approach and the use
of HTML Source mode. It also includes enhancements to search and add relevant localized
syntax tags. A ‘Send Preview’ functionality is available allowing a preview email of a modified
template to be sent to the logged in administrator.
The editor must be enabled globally (System Admin>Configuration>Global Variables). The use
of the editor at the template level is enabled by checking the ‘Use Editor Content When Sending
Email Notifications’ checkbox. The editor is opened in a pop-up upon clicking the ‘Launch
Editor’ link. The editor is pre-populated with the content from the Body message and Subject
lines of the existing template. The content is inherited and displayed into the selected locale on
launch, and on changing the locale from the locale dropdown.
The use of the editor is available at the Item/Scheduled Offering/Questionnaire Survey level and
can be enabled by checking the “Use Editor Content When Sending Email Notifications”
checkbox for the respective Notification template in the Notifications page. The editor is opened
in a pop-up upon clicking the “Launch Editor” link. The template and associated settings are
inherited from the Global template and can be over-ridden at the Item/Scheduled
Offering/Questionnaire Survey level.
Item and Registration specific notification text is available at the Item and Scheduled Offering
level respectively. This text can be included in notification emails using the appropriate syntax
tags:
 Item Notification Text: learning plan assignment and learning expiration notification
emails.
 Registration Notification Text: registration and scheduled offering reminder notification
emails.
Notes

237
13.2 Search Selectors
Search selector files handle the configuration of global search properties. When administrators
search for entities, they may select from a list of available criteria (Add/Remove Criteria). When
they view the results of a search, the Field Chooser allows them to choose which columns to
display. Both of these settings are controlled per entity in search selector files. Making any
configuration changes to the mandatory, default and optional criteria in the Add/Remove Criteria
and Field Chooser is done from these files.
The search selector files control the global search interface, including which entity criteria
require a sub-search to populate or a drop-down menu option.
The Search All Locales radio buttons are displayed on the administrator search pages where
data has been localized. Data that has been localized refers to text that appears on the screen
in the locale selected for the administrator. For example, the title of an item can be displayed in
multiple languages, depending on the language packs installed. Not all searchable fields will
have multiple language selections, but for those that do, the search will include all locales in the
keyword search when enabled. When disabled, only the administrator’s locale will be searched,
and no other languages will be displayed.
Search selectors are modified in xml and should only be edited by designated system
Administrators with an understanding of xml syntax.
System Admin > Configuration > Search Selectors

Notes
Consideration of the use of searching for all locales; the default view of available criteria for
search screens; the use of a drop-down box or the search icon (also known as “Picker” –
shown as a magnifying glass); and the page that displays in a default search screen.
For changes to the search defaults you can navigate to System Admin > Configuration >
Search Selectors>File to edit and change these values:
properties.EntitySearchDefaultToResultPage=false
properties.PickerSearchDefaultToResultPage=false
dropDownEnabled=false
dropDownId=null
dropDownDisplay=null

13.3 System Configuration Files


In 6.2.3, SuccessFactors switched from XML System Configuration files to .properties files. The
following sections document the configuration of system properties files which control much of
the global application settings. We recommend that you read the comments to understand how
changing the file affects the system. To avoid accidental modification of any one of the files, we
recommend that you create backup files for each one. Some changes to the configuration files
require restarting the server.

238
13.3.1 ATTACHMENT
The Attachment configuration contains the document attachment settings.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > ATTACHMENT
ATTACHMENT
Default Chose
Description
Value n Value
[jpeg]=tru
e
[jpg]=true
[png]=true
supportedAttachmentTypes[file extension]=true
[doc]=true
This is a list of the supported attachment (file) types that will be
[pdf]=true
considered as a valid attachment. The values are not case sensitive.
[xls]=true You can add to this list using the format shown to the left. To remove
a file type, simply comment out the line or delete the line.
[xlsx]=true
[ppt]=true
[txt]=true
[xml]=true
Additional file types can be listed here.
maximumSizePerAttachmentKB=800
800
The maximum size of a single attachment in KB. 1KB=1024 bytes
totalAttachmentsSpaceAllocatedKB=2048000
2048000
Total attachment space allocated in KB
true attachmentsEnabledForEntity.REVIEW_DOCUMENTS=true
true attachmentsEnabledForEntity.LEARNING_ITEM_HISTORY=true
attachmentsEnabledForEntity.LEARNING_EXTERNAL_HISTORY=tru
true
e

13.3.2 AUTHENTICATION
The Authentication file contains general security settings and process information.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > AUTHENTICATION

239
AUTHENTICATION
Ch
ose
Default Value n Description
Val
ue
handlerClassName.ADMIN=com.plateausystems
.elms.bo.authentication.helper.ElmsAuthenticatio
n

com.plateausystems.elms.bo.authe PwaAuthenticate is the authentication handler for


ntication.helper.ElmsAuthentication Administrators.
A custom authentication should implement
com.plateausystems.elms.bo.authentication.help
er.CustomizableAuthentication and can be
tailored to authenticate against other data
sources (other databases, ldap, etc.)
handlerClassName.USER=com.plateausystems.
elms.bo.authentication.helper.PwsElmsAuthentic
ation

com.plateausystems.elms.bo.authe PwsAuthenticate is the authentication handler for


ntication.helper.PwsElmsAuthentica End Users.
tion
A custom authentication should implement
com.plateausystems.elms.bo.authentication.help
er.CustomizableAuthentication and can be
tailored to authenticate against other data
sources (other databases, ldap, etc.)
casEnabled=false
False The authentication settings are set to true if CAS
is enabled for Single Sign On
crossAppEnabled=true

True Set to true if related admins and users can switch


between the admin and user interface without re-
logging in

240
AUTHENTICATION
Ch
ose
Default Value n Description
Val
ue
ssoTokenLapseTimeInSeconds=180
SSO Authentication Token expiration time in
seconds, this time in seconds will be used when
180 generating the SSO auth token and expiration
date set on that
token is (currentTimestamp during generation of
the ticket + lapse time)
httpSessionTimeout=1800
The value of HTTPSessionTimeout is passed to
HTTPSession.setMaxInactiveInterval() each time
180 (seconds) a session is created. 1800 represents seconds
and is equal to 30 minutes. This overrides the
value specified in web.xml for the session
timeout (in the session-config/session-timeout
element).
springRemotingAuthenticationEnabled=true

true The tms spring remoting (web service)


authentication is enabled by default. To disable
the authentication, you need to set
springRemotingAuthenticationEnabled to false

defaultSpringRemotingUser=Please specify an
admin user here when
springRemotingAuthenticationEnabled is
Please specify an admin user here disabled
when
springRemotingAuthenticationEnabl
ed is disabled AND provide a default remoting user. We
recommend creating an admin user without
assigning any roles for better security.

241
AUTHENTICATION
Ch
ose
Default Value n Description
Val
ue
authenticationProviders.ADMIN[adminLdapAuthe
nticationProvider]=false
authenticationProviders.ADMIN[adminDaoAuthe
nticationProvider]=true
authenticationProviders.USER[learnerLdapAuthe
nticationProvider]=false
authenticationProviders.USER[learnerDaoAuthe
nticationProvider]=true
false
true
Authentication Providers for the Admin's
false application
true The providers will be used in the sequential order
during the authentication.
The out of box providers are
adminDaoAuthenticationProvider and the
adminLdapAuthenticationProvider, which are
defined in the defined in the
ElmsSecurityContext.xml
Use the adminLdapAuthenticationProvider.AD for
Active directory Server LDAP
loginPolicy.ADMIN.lockout=true
loginPolicy.USER.lockout=true
Determines the system behavior during user
login process. "Lockout" enables/disables the
Admin – true check for the number of times an admin/user
tries to login. # If it is set to true the LMS will
User - true lock out the admin/user after n login failures (The
number of login failures can be set in
Admin/System Admin/Login Attempts). If it is set
to false, the number of login failures cannot be
edited, and the admin/user may attempt to login
any number of times.

242
AUTHENTICATION
Ch
ose
Default Value n Description
Val
ue
loginPolicy.ADMIN.forcePasswordExpiration=tru
e
loginPolicy.USER.forcePasswordExpiration=true
Admin – true Specifies to turn on or off the "immediately
User - true change password" feature. This allows clients
with LDAP to turn this feature off, which prevents
users from having to immediately change their
passwords (after first login or after administrator
forced password reset).
loginPolicy.ADMIN.caseSensitivePassword=true

Admin – true loginPolicy.USER.caseSensitivePassword=true

User - true Specifies whether the password match during


User login should be a case sensitive match or
not.
loginPolicy.ADMIN.caseSensitiveID=true
loginPolicy.USER.caseSensitiveID=true
If the userId element is set to true, then end user
IDs are case sensitive. The end user IDs
JOHN_DOE and john_doe are treated as two
Admin – true different IDs. If set to false, then JOHN_DOE and
User - true john_doe are treated as the same ID. The
adminId element has the same behavior, but it
applies to administrator IDs and not end user
IDs. By default, both the adminId element and
the userId element are set to true. The system
won't allow duplicate users with Ids differ only in
case to be created if the element is turned off

13.3.3 BIZX
The Authentication file contains general security settings and process information.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > BIZX

243
BIZX
Chosen
Default Value Description
Value
successFactorsLearningEnabled=true

false Must be set to true when integration with SuccessFactors is


enabled.

wrapNativeDeeplinksWithBizXURL=true

End users that have native LMS direct links, but their
instance is now integrated, can continue to use the same
direct links and will be properly routed to BizX Platform for
false
authentication.

Note: Site direct links are unaffected by this – i.e. users are
properly directed to the Site login regardless of whether this
feature is turned on
createIntegratedExternalUser=true

Enable Learning sites to send external users to SAP


SuccessFactors so that when users from the extended
enterprise sign up through Learning sites, they have access
false to other SAP SuccessFactors features.

# A value of true is only supported if


successFactorsLearningEnabled=true. Default: false

13.3.4 CATALOG
This configuration contains settings for the Catalogs.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > CATALOG

244
Catalog Settings
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value
catalogBrowseEnabled=false
This configuration enables the user to launch the catalog browse
page rather than the catalog search results page when clicking
Browse All Courses from the Find Learning tile
false
Default configuration is false, which launches the catalog search
results page with a blank keyword search, and the user can filter
from there.
Configuration options: true or false
catalogSearch3Enabled=true
This configuration enables the user to launch the catalog Search
3.0 page rather than the catalog search results page when
clicking search from the Find Learning tile
true true
Default configuration is true, which launches the catalog search
3.0 page
Catalog search 2.0 is deprecated.
Configuration options: true is the only valid option
false ItemHoursDisplay=false
false programHoursDisplay=false
showItemRatingInCatalog=true

true When set to true, the item rating appears in the user catalog.
Max item rating is controlled in the maxItemRatingValue
element. (applies to all entities)
displayMaxItemDescriptionLength=100
100 The maximum length (in characters) of a learning item
description that displays in the catalog.
expandCatalogSearchBarFilters=false
This configuration is used to specify whether to display language
false and currency filters by default on the search bar.
True: Displays search bar with filters
False: Displays filters as collapsed. Legacy behavior.
enableCatalogSearchTypeAhead=true
false This configuration is used to enable/disable the catalog search
type ahead feature.

245
Catalog Settings
catalogSearchSortByOptionsOrder=Relevance, Price, Tier,
Rating, Title
This configuration is used to change the order of sort options on
Relevance,
the catalog search screen.
Price, Tier,
Rating, Title By default, it will be Relevance, Price, Tier, Rating, Title. First
option on the list will be default sorting order on the catalog
search screen. You can remove any sorting option if you do not
want to support.
catalogSearchCategories[Curricula]=true
catalogSearchCategories[External]=true
catalogSearchCategories[OnlineCourses]=true
catalogSearchCategories[OtherLearning]=true
catalogSearchCategories[Program]=true
catalogSearchCategories[QuickGuide]=true
catalogSearchCategories[Collection]=true
This configuration specifies the categories that are enabled and
thereby searchable in the catalog search.
Certain categories like 'Instructor Led' are required and cannot
be configured
catalogSearchFilters[DeliveryMethod]=true
catalogSearchFilters[Location]=true
catalogSearchFilters[Source]=true
catalogSearchFilters[SubjectArea]=true
catalogSearchFilters[Rating]=false
This configuration allows certain catalog search filters to be
disabled. All others cannot be configured.
catalogSearchEngine=DEFAULT
This configuration property specifies the search engine to use for
catalog searches. Default configuration is the Progressive-
DEFAULT
Relevance based engine.
Valid values are DEFAULT, OCCURRENCE_RELEVANCE, or
PROGRESSIVE_RELEVANCE
showMobileReadinessIndicators=false
false This configuration property specifies whether to display the
Mobile Ready indicators.

246
Catalog Settings
Calendar Lazy Persistence
This setting specifies if the persistence is lazy (does not have to
happen immediately). SuccessFactors recommends setting this
True to “true” for best performance. The User’s sort preferences are
“remembered” by SuccessFactors Learning. It does not save
these preferences immediately. If preferences do not save,
change this setting to “false” (this may occur in a clustered
environment). Do Not Change
excludedWeekDays.Sunday=true
excludedWeekDays.Saturday=true
Calendar preferences are defaulted. The user has the
Sunday opportunity to change the default settings to his or her own
Saturday preferences.
Weekdays excluded from calendar display, from the list of:
Sunday,Monday,Tuesday,Wednesday,Thursday,Friday,Saturday
Choose the days to exclude from the Calendar
firstDayOfWeek=Monday
Monday First day of week from:
Sunday,Monday,Tuesday,Wednesday,Thursday,Friday,Saturday
calendarDailyTimeSlotStartTime=0700
calendarDailyTimeSlotEndTime=1900
0700 calendarDailyTimeSlotSize=60
1900 Time Display for Daily Events (in 24 hour time)
60 Start Time
End Time
Slot Minutes
rememberCalendarMode=false
False SuccessFactors remembers the User’s last Calendar view (day,
week, or month).
monthlyLearningCalendarDailyEventDisplayLimit=2
2 This setting is the maximum number of events to display in a
single day cell within the Month View of the Learning Calendar.
monthlyCatalogCalendarDailyEventDisplayLimit=3
3 This setting is the maximum number of events to display in a
single day cell within the Month View of the Catalog Calendar.

247
Catalog Settings
browseCatalogBannerContents[Featured]=true
browseCatalogBannerContents[Revised]=false
browseCatalogBannerContents[New]=false
browseCatalogBannerContents[AdminRecommendation]=false
browseCatalogBannerContents[P2PRecommendation]=false
browseCatalogBannerContents[LFRecommendation]=false
browseCatalogBannerContents[Rated-4-and-up]=false

This configuration property allows the admin to select the


content types that go into the banner on the Browse Catalog
landing page

maxInitialCategoryCards=8
This configuration property allows the admin to set the maximum
8 number of cards to display for each category on the Browse
Catalog landing page
Allowed values: 1 to 40
catalogSearchPrefixes=

This property allows you to set prefixes that should be appended


BLANK to searches when a single keyword is used. For example, if you
have title that starts with an ID that is always prefixed with [, then
added [ as a prefix, that allows the user to search by the id alone
without the [ prefix. A maximum of 3 prefixes are supported.

keywordsToIgnore=

This property allows you to set keywords that should be ignored


during the keyword search. These should be terms that are so
generic that they add no value to the keyword search and result
in too many matches. In the event that the user supplies a single
keyword and it is in this ignore list, only an exact match search
(i.e. no wildcarding) will be run on the keyword. A maximum of 5
comma delimited terms are supported.

248
Catalog Settings
calendar3Enabled=true
This configuration allows the admin to configure the new
true Calendar feature that aligns with Catalog Search 3.0
Default configuration is true
Configuration options: true is the only valid option
catalogResultsViewMode=Card
Card
Valid options are Card, List

249
13.3.5 CERTIFICATE IMAGE ATTACHMENT
This configuration contains the certificate image attachment settings.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > CERTIFICATE IMAGE
ATTACHMENT
CERTIFICATE IMAGEATTACHMENT
Chosen
Default Value Description
Value
[jpeg]=true certificateImageAttachmentTypes[file extension]=true
[jpg]=true This is a list of the supported attachment (file) types that will
be considered as a valid Certificate Image attachment. The
[png]=true
values are not case sensitive. You can add to this list using
the format shown to the left. To remove a file type, simply
comment out the line or delete the line.
Additional file types can be listed here.
certificateImageMaximumSizePerAttachmentKB=800
The maximum size of a single attachment in KB. 1KB=1024
bytes

13.3.6 COLLECTION IMAGE ATTACHMENT (Preview release)


This configuration contains the collection image attachment settings.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > COLLECTION IMAGE
ATTACHMENT
COLLECTION IMAGE ATTACHMENT
Chosen
Default Value Description
Value
[jpeg]=true collectionImageAttachmentTypes[file extension]=true
[jpg]=true This is a list of the supported attachment (file) types that will
be considered as a valid Collection Thumbnail/Cover Page
[png]=true
image attachment. The values are not case sensitive. You
can add to this list using the format shown to the left. To
remove a file type, simply comment out the line or delete the
line.
Additional file types can be listed here.
collectionImageMaximumSizePerAttachmentKB=1000
The maximum size of a single attachment in KB. 1KB=1024
bytes

250
13.3.7 CONNECTORS
Please review the Connectors Workbook for the SuccessFactors Connectors’ properties.

13.3.8 CONSENT STATEMENTS ATTACHMENT


CONSENT STATEMENTS ATTACHMENT
Chosen
Default Value Description
Values
supportedAttachmentTypes[pdf]=true
true The maximum size of a single content upload
(file) in KB. 1KB=1024 bytes
maximumSizePerAttachmentKB=5120
5120 The maximum size of a single attachment in
KB. 1KB=1024 bytes.

13.3.9 CONTENT IMPORT


This configuration contains the maximum allowed file size for Content Import.

CONTENT IMPORT
Cho
sen
Default Value Description
Val
ues
maximumFileSizeKB=10000

10000
The maximum size of a single content upload
(file) in KB. 1KB=1024 bytes
supportedFileExtensions=*.zip;*.pdf;*.doc;*.docx;
*.rtf;*.html;*.htm;*.xls;*.xslx;*.ppt;*.pptx
*.zip;*.pdf;*.doc;*.docx;*.rtf;*.html;*
.htm;*.xls;*.xslx;*.ppt;*.pptx
List of support file extensions supported by bulk
content import tool.

251
CONTENT IMPORT
Cho
sen
Default Value Description
Val
ues
handlerTimeout=60000

60000 The timeout in milliseconds. Default is 1 minute


Note this timeout should be less than your HTTP
server's timeout.
IContentNotificationEmailAddress=

Provide an email to be notified of upload


activities.
backgroundThresholdFileSizeKB=4000

4000
The maximum size of attachment that can be
imported without background job in KB.
1KB=1024 bytes.

1.1.1 DIRECT_LINK
This file will manage the Direct Link Configuration. The Direct Link functionality allows an
administrator to create a URL to use in emails, media, etc. that allows Users to click on the link
and go straight to the page within the LMS (if SSO is enabled) or after logging in. There is no
need to enter the host name, context, or protocol values as the system will determine those
settings automatically.
 Learning Plan  Registration
 Home Page  Online Content
 Catalog Simple Search  Reports
 Learning History  Reports with Criteria
 Current Registration  Curricula
 External Requests  Questionnaire Surveys
 Employee Subordinates  Pending Reviews and Approvals –
 Item Details  Pending Reviews and Approvals –
 Scheduled Offering Details Training
 Collections

Any removals or additions to direct links would be created in this file.

252
13.3.10 ENTITY_IMPORT
This configuration contains the entity import settings. It provides a list of the attachment (file)
types that will be considered as a valid attachment for importing user data.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > ENTITY_IMPORT
ENTITY_IMPORT
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value
[xls]=true supportedAttachmentTypes=
[xlsx]=true Allowable file formats for import
600 maximumSizePerAttachmentKB=
The maximum size of a single attachment in KB. 1KB=1024
bytes. A value of "0" indicates that there is no limit.
-1 backgroundJobThreshold=
Total rows allowed for online import job. If rows more than
this setting, the import will be executed as background job

13.3.11 FINANCIAL
These are general global commerce related settings.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > FINANCIAL
FINANCIAL: General Financial Settings
Chosen
Default Value Description
Value
Gray Cell Indicates Default Setting is Strongly Recommended.

autoOrderApproval=true
autoOrderApproval processes the order automatically once the
true true order is "submitted".
Note that autoOrderApproval takes the value true only. Setting
it to false is not supported.
autoCreateMasterInventory=true
If “false”, Administrators must manually add Items to the Master
true Inventory.
Note: Administrator cannot add Items to Catalogs that are not in
the Master Inventory.

253
FINANCIAL: General Financial Settings

financialTxApprovalRequired=true

true If set to “true” the financial transactions are approved by an


Administrator before SuccessFactors allows extraction of the
transactions.
skuPrefix=SKU-
SKU-
SKU Prefix
orderNoPrefix=ORDNO-
ORDNO-
Order Number Prefix
orderTicketNoPrefix=ORDTKTNO-
ORDTKTNO-
Order Ticket Number Prefix
shoppingAccountPrefix=SHPNGACCTID-
SHPNGACCTID-
Shopping Account Prefix
shoppingAccountTypeStudent=INTERNAL
INTERNAL Default Shopping Account Types
User (Student)
shoppingAccountTypeOrganization=INTERNAL
INTERNAL Default Shopping Account Types
Organization

FINANCIAL
Cho
Defau
sen
lt Description
Valu
Value
e

externalStudentPaymentMethodChargebackEnabled=true
true
The Payment methods that can be used at the Shopping Cart Checking Out
externalStudentPaymentMethodCreditCardEnabled=false
false
Can the external student use credit card payment method
creditCardAuthorizationEnabled=false

false Credit Card Online Authorization


This setting enables credit card payments in the SuccessFactors User
application.

254
FINANCIAL

creditCardAuthorizationHandlerClass=com.plateausystems.elms.framework.c
Out- reditcard.impl.CreditCardPaymentAuthorizationImpl
of-box Handler Class
This setting specifies the class that handles credit card authorization.
chargebackRefundTXHandlerClass=com.plateausystems.elms.framework.fin
Out- ancial.impl.DefaultChargebackRefundTXHandlerImpl
of-box Chargeback Refund TX Handler Class
This setting specifies the class that handles chargeback refunds.
creditCardRefundTXHandlerClass=com.plateausystems.elms.framework.cred
Out- itcard.impl.CreditCardRefundTXHandlerImpl
of-box Credit Card Refund TX Handler Class
This setting specifies the class that handles credit card refunds.
creditCardSecurityCodeMasked=true
true
Masked: mask the credit card security code as it is entered? default: true
expYearOffset=10
10 Number of expiration years to show in the drop down, starting with the current
year
validateCreditCardNumber=true
true #validate: Validate the credit card number before passing it to the payment
connector? Default: true
creditCardNumberMasked=false
false
Masked: mask credit card number as it is entered? Default: false
storeLast4Digits=true
true StoreLast4Digits: Store last four digits for the credit card number? Default:
true
paymentGateway=PayPal
RECOMMENDED FOR ALL USERS OF PAYPAL'S PAYFLOW ACCOUNTS
PayPa
To use Payflow from PayPal, you need both a PayPal account and an active
l
Payflow Pro account. See PayPal and their documentation for more
information about setting up and activating the accounts gateway: make sure
that the entry exactly matches the labels

255
FINANCIAL

paymentGatewayPartner=
#In the partner element, type the ID provided to you by the authorized PayPal
#Reseller who registered you for the Payflow SDK. If you purchased your
null account
#directly from PayPal, use PayPal. Limitations: Twelve alphanumeric, case-
sensitive characters.
#The partner element/value is required
paymentGatewayVendor=
#In the vendor element, type your merchant login ID that you created when
null you registered for the account.
#Limitations: Sixty-four alphanumeric, case-sensitive characters.
#The vendor element/value is required.
paymentGatewayUser=
#In the user element, type the ID provided to you by the authorized
#PayPal Reseller who registered you for the Payflow SDK.
null
#If you purchased your account directly from PayPal, use PayPal.
#Limitations: Sixty-four alphanumeric, case-sensitive characters.
#The user element/value is Required
paymentGatewayPassword=
#paymentGatewayPassword: password that you created during registration
null or that was created by the administrator on the account.
#The password will be encrypted automatically when you change it here.
#A password is required.
paymentGatewayCurrencies[USD]=true
true
#currency code(s) accepted by the payment connector
paymentGatewayProxyAddress=
paymentGatewayProxyPort=

null paymentGatewayProxyLogon=
paymentGatewayProxyPassword=
#Network configuration details. Your network administrator can provide you
with these values.

256
FINANCIAL

userPurchaseOrderBalanceDisplay=true
true
#Enables/Disables purchase order balance display for users.
displayPurchaseOrdersToUsers=true
true #Enables/Disables display of purchase orders assigned to a user in My
Order's->Purchasing Options and Shopping cart Checkout Page.
showPricingInternalUsers=true
showPricingExternalUsers=true
This configuration is used to show/hide price related search features and
indicators in specific user screens.
true When set to false, catalog search will not include currency filter or price
sorting and prices will not be displayed in user catalog, user registration and
available offerings.
WARNING: This configuration does not turn off commerce functionality and
should not be set to false if any learning has a Price associated for the
respective user group.
fullRefundWhenReenroll=false
This configuration enables an automatic refund on a previous order when re-
false enrolling, if previous withdraw from the same scheduled offering didn't result
in a full refund. The refund amount will bring the previous order line item to
zero charged, unless order level refunds exist.
Default configuration is false, which does not impact previous orders.
financialTransactionAPICutOffDate=01/01/2015
01/01/ Default cut-off date for the Financial Transactions ODATA API.
2015 The API will only return financial transactions created after this date.
The date should be specified in the format MM/DD/YYYY.
requireOrderTicketWhenSlotAvailable=true
true This configuration enables a user to register for a scheduled offering that is
not free without entering an Order Ticket number if their organization has an
unused slot. Options: false or true (default).

1.1.2 GAMIFICATION
This configuration contains settings for Gamification Service Integration.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > GAMIFICATION

257
GAMIFICATION
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value

gamificationEnabled=false
false
To enable gamification, gamificationEnabled should be set to true.
false autoGenerateGamificationUserID=false
If set to true, the system will auto-generate Gamification User IDs for all
the LMS users with the Post Gamification Event Workflow when
gamificationEnabled is set to true.
The Gamification User ID will be auto-generated when the user action
triggers any event configured in the Admin->System Admin-
>Configuration->Gamification Settings

Gamification service provider settings: Bunchball


gamificationProviders[BUNCHBALL].enabled=false
gamificationProviders[BUNCHBALL].name=BUNCHBALL
gamificationProviders[BUNCHBALL].label=label.gsp.ProviderBunchball
This section is to configure the integration with the required Gamification
service provider.
Only one Gamification Service provider can be enabled at a time.

gamificationProviders[BUNCHBALL].apiURL=https://api.bunchball.net/v0
The base URL to access the Bunchball gamification service
Example: baseURL=https://bunchball.com

gamificationProviders[BUNCHBALL].config.appKey=
The API key required for Bunchball.
The LMS admin needs to log into Bunchball Admin console.
This is retrieved from Bunchball Admin Console -> Configuration -> Site
Settings.
For Sandbox, prefix API key with "Sandbox-"
For Production, prefix API key with "Production-"
Example: Sandbox-19e4b26219914137abd62d1bc79063f9

258
GAMIFICATION
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value

gamificationProviders[BUNCHBALL].config.secretKey=
Bunchball API secret key
The LMS admin needs to log into Bunchball Admin console.
This is retrieved from Bunchball Admin Console -> Configuration -> Site
Settings.
Secret Key will be encrypted on save

1.1.3 ICONTENT
This configuration contains settings for iContent integration.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > ICONTENT
ICONTENT
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value

enableApplicationEntitlement=false
false To enable LMS entitlement, enableApplicationEntitlement
should be set to true.

1.1.4 IMAGE ATTACHMENT


This configuration contains the settings for Image Attachments for Custom Tile and Item
Thumbnail images.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > IMAGE ATTACHMENT
IMAGE ATTACHMENT
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value
[jpeg]=true imageAttachmentTypes[file extension]=true
[jpg]=true This is a list of the supported attachment (file) types that will
be considered as a valid attachment. The values are not
[png]=true
case sensitive. You can add to this list using the format
shown to the left. To remove a file type, simply comment out
the line or delete the line.
Additional file types can be listed here.

259
IMAGE ATTACHMENT
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value
100 imagemaximumSizePerAttachmentKB=
The maximum size of a single attachment in KB. 1KB=1024
bytes.

1.1.5 LEARNER_SECURITY
User Roles grant access to menus in the User application. This configuration contains the
workflows and restrictions settings for users. The section of the file with the heading of “…
restricted user-side…” contains all user workflows (menus) that are inaccessible to Supervisors
when viewing a Subordinate record, regardless of the User Role assigned. E.g., If a
Supervisor’s User Role specifies access to ‘Browse Catalog,’ and the Browse Catalog workflow
is listed here, Supervisors may browse their own catalog, but not those of their subordinates
when in subordinate view mode
Workflows may be removed from this file if necessary, but it is recommended that XML
comments be used instead of deleting the references. Workflows may also be added. Adding
workflows to this file requires duplicating the syntax of the other workflows in the file. Find the
User workflow in System Admin > Security > Role Management, copy and paste the workflow
name into this file. It is recommended to use XML comments to document the addition.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > LEARNER_SECURITY
LEARNER_SECURITY
Mapping user-side URLs to the Workflows in which the URLs are used. Enter any changes to
the existing file.

# Mapping user-side URLs to the Workflows those URLs are used in.
Add default value and change value below.

Chang
Default Value ed
Value
See configuration file in application.
# A list of restricted user-side URLs
Chang
Default Value ed
Value
userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinateCompetencyAssessmentProcesses=S
TUDENT Access Subordinate Competency Assessment Processes

260
LEARNER_SECURITY
Mapping user-side URLs to the Workflows in which the URLs are used. Enter any changes to
the existing file.

userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessLearningPlans=STUDENT Access Learning Plans


userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinatePerformanceReviews=STUDENT
Access Subordinate Performance Reviews
userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinates=STUDENT Access Subordinates
userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinateDeadlineDashboard=STUDENT
Access Subordinate Deadline Dashboard
userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinateGoalStatusDashboard=STUDENT
Access Subordinate Goal Status Dashboard
userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinatePerformanceReviewStatusDashboard
=STUDENT Access Subordinate Performance Review Status Dashboard
userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessEmployeeMatrix=STUDENT Access Employee
Matrix
userRestrictionWorkflows.AccessDevelopmentPlans=STUDENT Access
Development Plans
# A list of restricted user-side URLs when assuming the identity of another user
Chang
Default Value ed
Value
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessCompetencyAssessmentProcesses=S
TUDENT Access Competency Assessment Processes
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessPerformanceReviews=STUDENT
Access Performance Reviews
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessAdvancedCatalogSearch=STUDENT
Access Advanced Catalog Search
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessBrowseCatalog=STUDENT Access
Browse Catalog
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessCalendarofOfferings=STUDENT
Access Calendar of Offerings
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSimpleCatalogSearch=STUDENT
Access Simple Catalog Search
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinateCompetencyAssessmentP
rocesses=STUDENT Access Subordinate Competency Assessment Processes

261
LEARNER_SECURITY
Mapping user-side URLs to the Workflows in which the URLs are used. Enter any changes to
the existing file.

userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessDevelopmentPlans=STUDENT Access
Development Plans
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessLearningPlans=STUDENT Access
Learning Plans
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessRegistrations=STUDENT Access
Registrations
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinatePerformanceReviews=ST
UDENT Access Subordinate Performance Reviews
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinates=STUDENT Access
Subordinates
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinateDeadlineDashboard=STU
DENT Access Subordinate Deadline Dashboard
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinateGoalStatusDashboard=ST
UDENT Access Subordinate Goal Status Dashboard
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSubordinatePerformanceReviewStatu
sDashboard=STUDENT Access Subordinate Performance Review Status
Dashboard
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessEmployeeMatrix=STUDENT Access
Employee Matrix
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessCompensationManagement=STUDEN
T Access Compensation Management
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessApprovals=STUDENT Access
Approvals
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessMyCommunities=STUDENT Access
My Communities
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessOrderStatus=STUDENT Access Order
Status
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessOrderTickets=STUDENT Access
Order Tickets
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessShoppingCart=STUDENT Access
Shopping Cart
userAssumptionRestrictionWorkflows.AccessSkills=STUDENT Access Skills

13.3.12 LEARNING_ACCOMPLISHMENT

262
LEARNING_ACCOMPLISHMENT
learningAccomplishmentEnabled=false
false This configuration allows admin to enable or disable learning
accomplishment feature.

13.3.13 LMS_ADMIN
The LMS_ADMIN file contains general environmental settings, including some security,
locations of other servers and paths in the environment, and process information. This file is
organized into the following basic sections:

 SYSTEM: Contains settings for TMS Globally (and not a particular module)

 I18N BEHAVIOR: Contains settings for the internationalization system of Talent


Management

 HELP SYSTEM: Contains settings for the help system of Talent Management

 LEARNING CONTENT: Contains settings for the delivery of learning content to users

 BACKGROUND JOB: Contains settings for background job processing

 ALL USERS/APPLICATION INTERACTION SETTINGS: Contains settings to control


how all users (both admin and end) interact with the application

 END USERS/APPLICATION INTERACTION SETTINGS: Contains settings to control


how end users interact with the application

 ADMIN/APPLICATION INTERACTION SETTINGS: Contains settings to control how


administrators interact with the application

System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > LMS_ADMIN


LMS_ADMIN: Encryption

SuccessFactors Talent Management can have only one encryption handler, described in the
<Encryption> element. When you install the application, SuccessFactors includes three
encryption handlers and the configuration to point to them. Two are commented out, and the
recommended Sun JCE handler (option 3) is uncommented.
encryption.provider=SunJCE
SunJCE The encryption provider. The default is Sun JCE, but any JCE
provider can be used.
DESede encryption.algorithm=DESede

263
LMS_ADMIN: Encryption

encryption.key=32fb5dc8ba279870a0367e8fd1272423ab6bd68509
8b7565a2d3272aac094fe85a9a462c68af96bd
encryption.mode=
encryption.padding=

LMS_ADMIN: Database Preferences


Modify this configuration before implementation. Do not change these settings after
Administrators add data to the database. These settings specify date/time translation
between the database and application server. This element resolves problems when the
database and application server are in different locales.

 The settings below must match the database OS settings.

 This is default time zone for Administrator and User records.

 This is the current time zone for instances in notifications.


Default Value Chosen Value Description
MM/dd/yyyy Date Pattern
hh:mm:ss aaa Time Pattern
mm/dd/yyyy DB Date Pattern
hh:mi:ss AM DB Time Pattern
En ISO Language Code
US ISO Country Code
9999 Max Supported Year
-9999999999 Min limit to the size of numbers
9999999999 Max limit to the size of numbers
-9999999999.00 Min Decimal Value
9999999999.00 Max Decimal Value

LMS_ADMIN: Caching
Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

264
LMS_ADMIN: Caching

proxyCaching=false

false Inserts scripts to control the caching of pages by the


browser. The property proxyCaching controls caching for
Microsoft Internet Explorer.

nsBrowserCaching=false
false The property nsBrowserCaching controls the caching for
Mozilla browsers. By default, both are set to false.

LMS_ADMIN: WEB SERVICES


Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

false webServicesEnabled="false" /> Set the enabled attribute


to true if you want the Web Services to be accessible

LMS_ADMIN: Branding
Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

brandingEnabled=true
As we are in a state of transition from branding to theming,
this flag helps to manage the precedence between them
for the Flex-based views.

false When set to "false", BizX theming is applied to Flex-based


views and will override any branding applied to themeable
elements.
When set to "true", BizX theming will not be applied to
Flex-based views so that branding will be displayed.
Default: false.

LMS_ADMIN: I18N BEHAVIOR SETTING


Default Chosen
Value Value Description

265
LMS_ADMIN: I18N BEHAVIOR SETTING

isI18nLabelExceptionLoggingEnabled=true
These settings configure the behavior of the application when
a label is requested but is not found in the locale label cache.
If logging is desired, isI18nLabelExceptionLoggingEnabled
true should be enabled (set to true) and the log4j configuration file
can be tweaked as desired
(defaults to a separate missinglabels.log file in the logs folder).
If desired, a stack trace can also be spit out for missing
label detection up to a depth specified in the
stackTraceDepthForMissingLabelLogging.
stackTraceDepthForMissingLabelLogging=7
7 If this attribute is missing or zero, no stack trace will be output
with the error message logged for the missing label.
showPreferenceSelectorInDefaultHeader=true
false This configuration is used to show/hide the locale selector for
an unauthenticated user in the system default header when
more than one active locale exists.
allowRepeatedDBLookups=true
Once a label has been determined not to be in the cached
label set, the default behavior of the application is to check the
DB again to see if the label was added since the last label
cache read. This can be turned OFF by setting the enabled
true attribute of the allowRepeatedDBLookups property to false.
Otherwise, the i18nMissingLabelStatusTTL attribute is the
number of milliseconds to wait for any given label between DB
lookups. This can improve performance at the cost of a
temporarily stale missing label by preventing too many DB
lookups for the same missing label.
i18nMissingLabelStatusTTL=600000
If zero, there is no delay - all missing label lookups go to the
DB each time. This would be useful in a development phase
600000 of the application. However, for production it is recommended
to give this value an acceptable time to wait for labels to be
loaded. Default recommendation is 10 minutes (600,000
milliseconds).

266
LMS_ADMIN: I18N BEHAVIOR SETTING

allowRepeatedDBLookupsForLabelsStartingWith[label.u.]=true
If all labels added post-production begin with a known set of
prefixes, use this section to configure those known prefixes so
that the DB lookup processing for missing labels is fine-tuned
true to apply to only labels matching these "starts-with" patterns.
For each bracketed value, the value of the element becomes a
case-sensitive pattern matched against a missing label ID. If
the label ID starts with any of the patterns listed here, it is
eligible for another DB lookup after the
i18nMissingLabelStatusTTL has elapsed.

LMS_ADMIN: Help Files


Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

baseHelpRedirectURL=/help
To point to the location where the help.war file is
"/help" deployed. By default, this is a WAR file inside of the
application, so the context path is simply /help. If
deployed outside the application, you should give a
complete URL.

"/getHelpRedirector.do" helpRedirectorURI=/getHelpRedirector.do
Change the helpRedirectorURI only if you change the
struts action or want to go thru a custom redirector

267
LMS_ADMIN: Learning Content Settings
Window options when launching different course types. Create a new row for each course
type to be changed. The settings below are the same for aicc, scorm, browser, and
document, but can be changed individually for each one.
Chos
en
Default Value Description
Valu
e
width=800
height=600
top=0
left=0
contentWindowOpenOptions.aicc
toolbar=0
contentWindowOpenOptions.scorm
location=0
contentWindowOpenOptions.browser
directories=0
contentWindowOpenOptions.document
status=1
menubar=0
scrollbars=1
resizable=1
inlineContentWindowSize.aicc.
width=80
inlineContentWindowSize.aicc.
height=80 When content is opened inline in the same browser
window, the size of the IFrame that contains the
inlineContentWindowSize.scor content is controlled by these settings. You can set
m.width=80 different sizes for each launch method that supports
opening a content object inline. The configuration is
inlineContentWindowSize.scor
specified # as an integer percentage value (20-100)
m.height=80
of the parent browser window size.
inlineContentWindowSize.bro
If a value is not specified it will default to 80
wser.width=80
inlineContentWindowSize.bro
wser.height=80

268
contentTrackingFunctionReturnURL=/PwsTrackingF
unction
Servlet mapping for the
/PwsTrackingFunction PwsTrackingFuncitonsServlet, the tracking applet
will send HTTP message to this URL
PwsTrackingFunction Servlet tracks the completion
of Plateau Structured content. Default:
/PwsTrackingFunction
scorm2004ReturnURL=/ScormRteServlet
Servlet mapping for the SCORM 2004 RTE Servlet,
/ScormRteServlet the PlateauSCORM2004API applet will send HTTP
message to this URL
SCORM 2004 RTE tracks the completion of
SCORM 2004 content. Default: /ScormRteServlet
examQuestionReturnURL=/PwsStudentExamApi
Servlet mapping for the PwsStudentExamApi, the
/PwsStudentExamApi Exam Question will send HTTP message to this
URL.
PwsStudentExamApi tracks exam completion.
contentStructurePageExpireDuration=120
The Online Content Structure page expires after
being idle for this amount of time (in seconds). The
120 (seconds) expired page transitions to a page that supports
content communication (AICC and SCORM). When
the user returns to the Online Content Structure
page it is updated with content statuses.
contentStructurePageKeepAliveInterval=300
The Online Content Structure page has a keep alive
feature that is based on this amount of time (in
300 seconds).
0 - Session timeout-600 (i.e. 10 minutes)
Minimum : 120 (i.e. 2 minutes)
examResourceCacheMaxCount=100

100
The maximum number of resources that will be
cached by the PexamResorceServlet. Default: 100

269
examResourceCacheMaxCount=100

100
The maximum number of resources that will be
cached by the PexamResorceServlet. Default: 100

vleEnabled=false
The Vle element enables connection between the
LMS and Virtual Learning Servers (VLS) such as
WebEx.
When you set vleEnabled to true, you must also
configure the VLS. See VLS Configuration Guide.
false Setting Vle to true shows the VLS tabs in the
administration environment. Default: false
NOTE: Separate License Required
Also see:
System Admin > Configuration > Global Variables >
Mail > “Use Admin notification email address for
VLE notifications”
adHocEmailTemplateUsageEnabled=true
When adHocEmailTemplateUsageEnabled is set to
true, users can select a template in the Ad Hoc
true Notifications wizard.
When set to false, they cannot select a template.
This element only applies in an OnDemand license -
Product license environments ignore it. Default: true.

true aiccSecurityEnabled=true This is deprecated. Do


not change
aiccAccessControlAllowOriginEnabled=false
Access-Control-Allow-Origin CORS header for the
AICC endpoint PwsAicc
false
Enable it to allow AICC content hosted on a different
domain (cross-domain content) to communicate with
LMS server via Ajax, i.e XMLHttpRequest
aiccAccessControlAllowOriginHeader=*
Specify your content server domain instead of * for
better security, such as https://developer.mozilla.org

270
contentTestPagesEnabled=true
true Set this to false in production. Useful in a staging
environment to track issues.
userIdentityInformationCookieEnabled=false
Enabling this setting would store the current User
false ID, name in the cookie. This information may be
required for certain third party content to work
properly and may be useful if this is necessary.

cookieCrossDomainSupportEnabled=false

Cookie Cross-Domain Support enables launching


false and tracking API dependent courseware, such as
SCORM or SuccessFactors Tracking, with a
different domain name than SuccessFactors
Learning (e.g., a content server). The LMS and the
content server must share the top-level domain.
cookieCrossDomainSupportDomainName=plateaus
ystems.com
The Domain Name is the top-level domain.
SuccessFactors Learning with the domain
learning.plateausystems.com and a content server
<Customer Name>.com with the domain content.plateausystems.com share
the top-level domain plateausystems.com. Enabling
this setting loads SuccessFactors Learning
communication APIs under the configured domain
name. In addition, the actual courseware must
include JavaScript to truncate its Domain Name to
the top-level domain.

271
communicationCrossDomainSupportEnabled=false
Cookie Cross-Domain Support enables launching
and tracking API dependent courseware, such as
SCORM or SuccessFactors Tracking, with a
different domain name than SuccessFactors
Learning (e.g., a content server). This solution
False deploys SuccessFactors Learning courseware
communication APIs on the content server and
utilizes a communication proxy running on the
content server. The communication proxy relays
courseware data to SuccessFactors Learning.
Unlike the Cookie Cross-Domain solution, the
content server and the SuccessFactors Learning
server need not share a common top-level domain.
Use this setting in conjunction with the Cross-
Domain tab of Content Object and question records.
defaultContentServerPath=http://contentserver:7000
/content
This path is the default value for the folder
containing the LMS files deployed to the content
Out-of-box server. Administrators can override this value in the
Cross-Domain tab of a Content Object or question
record. (Sample) http://cms.com:80/content
Absolute URL can be specified, or else a URI path
that is relative to the LMS base URL (must start with
a slash).
http://cms.com:80/content contentWrapperPageName=main_content_wrapper.
html The Content Wrapper Page is the name of the
wrapper frameset that loads SuccessFactors
main_content_wrapper.html Learning courseware APIs and the training content.

scorm2004ContentWrapperPageName=scorm_200
scorm_2004_content_wrapper 4_content_wrapper.html The SCORM 2004 Content
.html Wrapper is the name of the SCORM 2004 wrapper
frameset that loads SCORM 2004 courseware APIs
and the training content.
externalURLQuestionWrapperPageName=main_qu
estion_wrapper.html The External URL Question
main_question_wrapper.html Wrapper Page is the name of the wrapper frameset
that loads the Exam APIs and an external question
configured to work with a SuccessFactors Exam.

272
contentOpenerPageName=main_content_opener.ht
ml The Content Opener Page is the name of the
main_content_opener.html page that loads the SuccessFactors Learning
courseware APIs. Unlike the wrapper page, the
opener page opens the actual training content in a
new window.
defaultProxletPath=http://contentserver:7000/proxlet
lmsSessionId=JSESSIONIDThe Default Proxlet
Path is the default value for the communication
http://cms:8080/proxlet proxy loaded on the content server. This path does
not include the Servlet Alias. Absolute URL can be
lmsSessionId=JSESSIONID specified, or else a URI path that is relative to the
LMS base URL (must start with a slash).
Administrators can override this value in the Cross-
Domain tab of a Content Object or question record.

LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling


Background jobs are asynchronous jobs that an administrator can set up and pass to the
Scheduler. Background jobs can be scheduled only during allowable time frames described
the settings shown below. Each Timeframe element defines a window: a date and time during
which administrators can run a background job. By default, each day is contained in brackets.
'...[Monday].enabled' means that background jobs will run on Mondays. However, the
bracketed text is just a string to denote one window. You could also for example create a
[Weekdays] and [Weekends] window. The default below shows one example of a non-day
bracketed value, [Christmas]. For each bracketed day, you can define start and end minutes,
hours, dates, months, etc. A * means any of the unit so if you have a * in minutes and
start/end hours between 0 and 5, then jobs can start on any minute between the hours of
Midnight and 5 AM. Note that hours are in 24-hour format so that 0 is Midnight and 13 is 1pm.
For procedures which require more processor time and resources to create settings that
restrict timeframe from 12:00am through 5:00am, Monday through Friday.

273
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling
Use the spaces below to record the available time frames for background jobs:
 Create as many time frames as needed

 Use an * to indicate “all”

 All “end” values must be greater than “start” values

 End hours include the specified hour. For example, 0 – 5 = 12:00 AM – 5:59:59 AM.

Time frames are relative to the DB time zone. SuccessFactors does not display the allowed
time frames in the Administrator specified time zone.
 Days of week are identified as sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, sat

 Day and Month are identified in two-digits. For example, January is 01, December is
12

Example:
Start Minute Hour Day Month Year Day of
Week
1 20 * * *
Thu

End Minute Hour Day Month Year Day of


Week
30 24 * * *
Sat
Explanatio Between Between 8:00 On Of Every In every On
n minutes 1 and pm and every month year. Thursday,
30 of each midnight on the day Friday, and
hour listed in days in the Saturday.
the hour interval listed in
column. the days.
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].enabled=true
lowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].startDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].startMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].startDayofWeek=mon

274
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].endHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].endDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].endMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Monday].endDayofWeek=mon
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].enabled=true
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].startDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].startMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].startDayofWeek=tue
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].endHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].endDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].endMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Tuesday].endDayofWeek=tue
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].enabled=true
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].startDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].startMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].startDayofWeek=wed
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].endHour=*

275
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].endDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].endMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Wednesday].endDayofWeek=wed
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].enabled=true
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].startDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].startMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].startDayofWeek=thu
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].endHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].endDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].endMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Thursday].endDayofWeek=thu
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].enabled=true
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].startDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].startMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].startDayofWeek=fri
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].endHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].endDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].endMonth=*

276
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Friday].endDayofWeek=fri
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].enabled=true
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].startDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].startMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].startDayofWeek=sat
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].endHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].endDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].endMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Saturday].endDayofWeek=sat
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].enabled=true
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].startDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].startMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].startDayofWeek=sun
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].endHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].endDate=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].endMonth=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Sunday].endDayofWeek=sun

277
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]enabled=true
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]startMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]startHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]startDate=25
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]startMonth=12
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]startYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]startDayofWeek=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]endMinute=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]endHour=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]endDate=25
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]endMonth=12
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]endYear=*
allowableBackgroundJobTimeframes[Christmas]endDayofWeek=*
Default Value Chosen Value Description

lateTimeWindow=30
LateTimeWindow sets a time
expression (in minutes) that
indicates the latest a timer trigger
may fire past its scheduled firing
30 time without being skipped.
For example, a late time window of
"30" means that a job may fire up to
thirty minutes late. If the job is more
than thirty minutes late, that job
firing is skipped.

278
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling

enableMakeupFiring=true
enableMakupFiring allows the last
late firing to occur. For example,
suppose a job is scheduled to fire
once a day, the scheduler is down
for a day, and the late time window
true is small enough such that all these
firings would be skipped when the
engine begins running again. If
makeup firings are not enabled,
then these late jobs will not fire. On
the other hand, if makeup firings are
enabled, then the last late job will
fire.
emailBatchCount=10000

10000 # Specifies the maximum number of


e-mail messages that will be sent at
any one time. Default: 10000
emailArchivePurgeBatchCount=100
0
1000 Specifies the maximum number of
e-mail messages that will be purged
from mail archive at any one time.
Default: 10000
numberOfRecordsToBeProcessedIn
ABatch=1000
Specifying the batch size greater
than 0 (zero) enables the
1000 processing of the records in
batches. This gives the ability to the
user to commit the transaction after
each batch has been processed.
Default: 1000
apmJobSettings.TRNGEXPIRE.ena
bled=true
Configuration for specific
true background/APM jobs. Use
Constants defined in the
ApmConstants class for the
background job names.

279
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling

apmJobSettings.TRNGEXPIRE.slee
pMilliSecondsBetweenBatches=99
99 The job will temporarily pause for a
number
(sleepMilliSecondsBetweenBatches)
of milliseconds between jobs.
apmJobSettings.TRNGEXPIRE.tran
sactionCommitSize=10000
10000
The job will be committed for every
batch (transactionCommitSize),
apmJobSettings.TALENTPROFILE
EXPIRATION.enabled=true
Configuration for specific
true background/APM jobs. Use
Constants defined in the
ApmConstants class for the
background job names.
apmJobSettings.TALENTPROFILE
EXPIRATION.sleepMilliSecondsBet
weenBatches=99
99 The job will temporarily pause for a
number
(sleepMilliSecondsBetweenBatches)
of milliseconds between jobs.
apmJobSettings.TALENTPROFILE
EXPIRATION.transactionCommitSiz
1000 e=1000
The job will be committed for every
batch (transactionCommitSize),
apmJobSettings.ADHOCTALENTP
ROFILEEXPIRATION.enabled=true
Configuration for specific
true background/APM jobs. Use
Constants defined in the
ApmConstants class for the
background job names.

280
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling

apmJobSettings.ADHOCTALENTP
ROFILEEXPIRATION.sleepMilliSec
ondsBetweenBatches=99
99 The job will temporarily pause for a
number
(sleepMilliSecondsBetweenBatches)
of milliseconds between jobs.
apmJobSettings.ADHOCTALENTP
ROFILEEXPIRATION.transactionCo
1000 mmitSize=1000
The job will be committed for every
batch (transactionCommitSize),
apmJobSettings.EXTERNALREQU
ESTFORMDATAUPGRADER.enabl
ed=true

true Configuration for specific


background/APM jobs. Use
Constants defined in the
ApmConstants class for the
background job names.
apmJobSettings.EXTERNALREQU
ESTFORMDATAUPGRADER.trans
500 actionCommitSize=500
The job will be committed for every
batch (transactionCommitSize),
apmJobSettings.ITEMJAMGROUPS
NOTIFICATION.enabled=true
Configuration for specific
true background/APM jobs. Use
Constants defined in the
ApmConstants class for the
background job names.
apmJobSettings.ITEMJAMGROUPS
NOTIFICATION.sleepMilliSecondsB
etweenBatches=99
99 The job will temporarily pause for a
number
(sleepMilliSecondsBetweenBatches)
of milliseconds between jobs.

281
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling

apmJobSettings.ITEMJAMGROUPS
NOTIFICATION.transactionCommit
10000 Size=10000
The job will be committed for every
batch (transactionCommitSize),
onlineOperationMaxRecordsCount=
5000
If the number of records that an
operation operates on exceeds this
5000 count the operation may have to be
scheduled as a background job to
run later instead of running online.
Assignment Profile jobs also
affected by the Assignment Profile
Job specific settings, below.
learningEventResynchronizationStu
dentCommitCount=50
50 Defines the batch size for learning
event resync commits. 0 - no limit.
Default: 50.
assignmentProfileBatchSize=1000
The queries are batched and
1000 executed at one time. This setting
determines how many queries are
executed in one batch. Default:
1000
assignmentProfileMetaDataCache=t
rue
true Determines if operator data is read
once and cached in memory or is
re-read from the database during
each background job. Default: true

282
LMS_ADMIN: Background Job Scheduling

assignmentProfileQueryHelper=com
.plateausystems.elms.bo.assignmen
tprofile.helper.AssignmentProfileQu
eryHelperImpl

Class implementing the


AssignmentProfileQueryHelper
com.plateausystems.el interface used to generate query
ms.bo.assignmentprofile strings that determine which users
.helper.AssignmentProfil should be associated with an
eQueryHelperImpl assignment profile. Default:
com.plateausystems.elms.bo.assign
mentprofile.helper.AssignmentProfil
eQueryHelperImpl
assignmentProfileQueryHelper=com
.plateausystems.elms.bo.assignmen
tprofile.helper.AssignmentProfileQu
eryHelperImpl
assignmentProfileTxnCommitBatch
Size=100
100 # The maximum number of records
committed during any one
transaction. Default: 100

283
LMS_ADMIN: ALL USERS/APPLICATION INTERACTION SETTINGS
Default Value Chosen Value Description

fileUploadMaxSize=
This setting limits the number of bytes which may be
104857600 posted back to the application server. This affects the
size of files which may be attached to email
(10Mb)
notifications but also the amount of data sent in typical
transactions, such as editing records. It can be set
between 0 and 2147483647(2 GB)
fileUploadFilenameMaxSize
255 This is the maximum amount of characters for a file
name to be uploaded to the server
resourceUploadMaxSize=524288
This is the limit, in bytes, of any image file uploaded to
524288 the server through PQE. Question authors can change
the "size" of an image file, but they are not changing
the actual size in the database. Rather, they are
constraining the rendering size.
resourceUploadWarningSize=262144
This is the limit, in bytes, of images that are uploaded to
262144 PQE without warning. If the image size is over the
resourceUploadWarningSize, but below
resourceUploadMaxSize, the question author is
warned, but not prevented from uploading the file.
hideUserPhotosGlobally=true If set to true all employee
True photos will be hidden EVERYWHERE in the application
(admin and end user interfaces).

LMS_ADMIN: Privacy Act


Default Value Chosen Value Description

privacyActDefaultMask=*********
Privacy Act masks enable the student ID and/or the
instructor ID to be hidden when a notification is sent or
********* when a report is printed. Admin running the report can
change it at report time.
Default Mask. This setting configures the appearance
of the mask.

284
LMS_ADMIN: Privacy Act
Masking in Email Notifications

privacyActMaskEnabled.Notification.StudentID=false
false

privacyActMaskEnabled.Notification.InstructorID=false
false

Masking in Reports
false privacyActMaskEnabled.Report.StudentID=false

false privacyActMaskEnabled.Report.InstructorID=false

Log Settings and Password Validation


Cho
sen
Default Value Description
Valu
e

reportStackTraceToUser=false (default setting) to


display a ticket number to user in the browser
(recommended for production environments). Set
to true to display the stack trace to the user in
false browser (recommended for development and test
environments).
Whether set to true or false, errors are always
logged through Log4J with a ticket number by
default in the plateau.log file
emailValidationEnabled=true SuccessFactors
true Learning verifies that the entered email contains a
Period ‘.’ and an ‘@’ symbol.
emailValidationClassName=com.plateausystems.
elms.util.helper.EmailValidationImpl
com.plateausystems.elms.util.hel See JavaDoc for details about syntax checking in
per.EmailValidationImpl EmailValidationImpl
Default:com.plateausystems.elms.util.helper.Email
ValidationImpl

285
Log Settings and Password Validation

showLegacyReports=false
emailValidationClassName=com.plateausystems.
elms.util.helper.EmailValidationImpl
false Set to true to show the legacy reports (reports
defined with old report framework) in the report
menus (both admin and end users).

LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Exam Settings


Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

restrictAccessToOtherComponentObjectsDuringExam=true
true Global setting whether to freeze the item’s content objects
while the exam is in progress. Set to false to allow "open
book" tests.

LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Learning Plan Configuration


Default Value Chosen Value Description

showDaysRemaining=false

false Set to true to show the Days Remaining Column rather


than the Required by column Curriculum Details page.
Default: false.
showAssignmentType=false

false Set to true to show the Assignment Type Column in the


Learning Plan Page, the Curriculum Details page, and
in the Home page. Default: false

LMS_ADMIN: Learning Plan Fields Chooser


Chos
Default Value en Description
Value
true learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.title.enabled=true
Title learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.title.columnID=title

286
LMS_ADMIN: Learning Plan Fields Chooser
label.Title earningPlanFieldsChooserItems.title.titleLabelID=label.Title
mandatory learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.title.visibility=mandatory
50 learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.title.width=50
true learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemID.enabled=true
itemID learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemID.columnID=itemID
label.ID learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemID.titleLabelID=label.ID
optional learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemID.visibility=optional
4 learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemID.width=4
true learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemType.enabled=true
itemType learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemType.columnID=itemType

label.Type learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemType.titleLabelID=label.Typ
e
default learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemType.visibility=default
4 learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.itemType.width=4
true learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.requiredBy.enabled=true

requiredBy learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.requiredBy.columnID=requiredB
y
label.RequiredB learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.requiredBy.titleLabelID=label.Re
y quiredBy
default learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.requiredBy.visibility=default
4 learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.requiredBy.width=4
true learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.status.enabled=true
status learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.status.columnID=status
label.Status learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.status.titleLabelID=label.Status
default learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.status.visibility=default
8 learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.status.width=8
true learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.daysRemaining.enabled=true

daysRemaining learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.daysRemaining.columnID=days
Remaining
label.DaysRemai learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.daysRemaining.titleLabelID=lab
ning el.DaysRemaining

287
LMS_ADMIN: Learning Plan Fields Chooser

optional learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.daysRemaining.visibility=option
al
4 learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.daysRemaining.width=4
true learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.assignmentType.enabled=true

assignmentType learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.assignmentType.columnID=assi
gnmentType
label.Assignmen learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.assignmentType.titleLabelID=la
tType bel.AssignmentType

optional learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.assignmentType.visibility=option
al
8 learningPlanFieldsChooserItems.assignmentType.width=8

LMS_ADMIN: Learning Plan Default Preferences


Default Value Chosen Value Description
learningPlanSystemPreferences.groupPlanFilter=None
The system default user learning plan settings. User
None can override with their own preferences. Defaults the
Group By drop-down. Possible values: None, ItemType,
AssignmentType,DueWithin, StatusTowardCompletion.
learningPlanSystemPreferences.itemsFilter=All
All Defaults the Filter By drop-down. Possible values: All,
With Online Content, Registered, In progress
learningPlanSystemPreferences.requiredByFilter=All
All Defaults the Required By drop-down. Possible values:
All, Next 30 Days, Next 60 Days, Next 90 Days.

LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Home Page Settings


Home Page Configuration to indicate which modules are displayed on the home page for
users
Default Value Chosen Value Description
true showHomeCatalogModule=true
true showHomeAlertsModule=true
true showHomeLearningPlanModule=true

288
LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Home Page Settings
true showHomeCareerPlanModule=true
true showHomeCurriculumModule=true
true showHomeNewItemModule=true
true showHomeFeaturedItemModule=true
true showHomeRevisedItemModule=true
5 homeLearningPlanModuleRecordsToDisplay=5
5 homeCareerPlanModuleRecordsToDisplay=5
5 homeCurriculumModuleRecordsToDisplay=5
25 homeFlaggedCatalogItemsToDisplay=25

LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Competency Search Settings


Default Value Chosen Value Description

showAllCoursesByDefault=false
This configuration is used for controlling whether on the
competency search screen, users by default see all
courses they have access to that are tied to the
specified competencies, or just the courses that match
or exceed their current competency rating.
false False: Users first see just the courses that match or
exceed their current competency rating. View only
items that help me close competency gaps is enabled
by default on the competency search screen.
True: Users first see all courses they have access to
that are tied to the specified competencies. View only
items that help me close competency gaps is disabled
by default on the competency search screen.

289
LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Persistence/Preferences
Default Value Chosen Value Description

studentSubordinatesLazyPersistence=true
This setting specifies if the persistence is lazy (does not
have to happen immediately). SuccessFactors
recommends setting this to “true” for best performance.
True The User’s sort preferences are “remembered” by
SuccessFactors Learning. It does not save these
preferences immediately. If preferences do not save,
change this setting to “false” (this may occur in a
clustered environment).
studentSubordinatesShowPictures=true
This setting shows/hides employee subordinate
pictures (if applicable) on the subordinate dashboard
True and succession planner. Setting to true makes ‘show
pictures’ the default for supervisors and organization
owners. If HideUserPhotosGlobally is set to True this
setting is irrelevant.
studentSubordinatesShowStatus=true
True This setting shows/hides employee subordinate status
by default on the subordinate dashboard and
succession planner.
studentSubordinatesShowSuccessors=true
True This setting shows/hides successors by default.
(Requires Succession Planner license).

LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Icon Preferences


Default Value Chosen Value Description
enableFontIcons=true

true
Controls the icon preference on the end user interface.
Default: true

LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Miscellaneous


Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

290
LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Miscellaneous

showCompetencyType=true
true This setting determines if the competency type is
displayed to the user when competencies are displayed.
talentPoolMaxGroupSize=1000
1000 Used only if Succession Planning is licensed. Contained
in system xml even if the module is not licensed.
searchNewPostsToCommunitiesInTheLastDays=14
Indicates the number of days from the current date to
14 search for a new post in the communities to which the
user has access. This setting is used on the user's home
page in the Communities button. Valid values are zero
and any value greater than zero.
displayRevisionInformationInToDoList=false
false This setting would turn on or off the display of revision
date time and number for items on the User's To-Do List.
reportingLevelsToDisplay=0
This value is the number of reporting levels down
displayed to a supervisor, delegate or alternate (not
HRBP) and should be an integer equal to or greater than
0.
0 Example:
If set to 0, the user will see all direct and indirect
subordinates.
If set to 1, the user will see their direct reports only.
If set to 2, the user will see their direct reports and direct
reports reporting into their direct reports and so on.

291
LMS_ADMIN: End User Interaction Behavior: Miscellaneous
displayNewsPageOnLogin=UserDiscretion

This configuration controls the display of the user


interface News page upon login. Valid values are below:

Never: News page would not display on login. The user


would still have the ability to get to news page from the
Easy Link menu.
UserDiscretion

Always: News page would always display on user login.


The User cannot dismiss this – the page would appear
every time they logged in.

UserDiscretion: News page would display upon login and


the user would have the ability (via check box) to not
display it each time. This is the default value.

LMS_ADMIN: Configuration Specific to Administrator


Default Value Chosen Value Description

userUIDefaultTabDisplayMode=advanced
Set to “simple” to default the records to show “simple”
Advanced mode (i.e., SuccessFactors displays a single row of the
most commonly used tabs). Administrators can change
their setting upon login.
userUILazyPersistence=true
This setting specifies if the persistence is lazy (does not
have to happen immediately). SuccessFactors
recommends setting this to “true” for best performance.
True The Administrator’s sort preferences are “remembered”
by SuccessFactors Learning. It does not save these
preferences immediately. If preferences do not save,
change this setting to “false” (this may occur in a
clustered environment).

292
LMS_ADMIN: Admin Application UI Behavior Configuration: Sticky Preferences
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value

userUILazyPersistence=true
True Specify if the persistence can be lazy (does not have to
happen immediately).
learningPlanDisplayInLearnerTimezone=true
Defaults the administrator's view of users' learning plans.
True Administrator can set own preference. If the option is true
then, by default, dates are displayed in the User's preferred
time zone. If false, it is displayed in the Admin's preferred time
zone.

LMS_ADMIN: Admin Application UI Behavior Configuration: Limits


Default Chosen
Description
Value Value

maxItemRatingValue=5.0
5.0 The maximum number of rating stars that SuccessFactors
Learning displays in the Catalog(s) for an Item.
scheduleCopiesLimit=50
Limits the amount of copies that the Copy Scheduled Offering
50 Wizard can make in the Admin Environment
Setting a reasonable limit prevents admins from mistakenly
overwhelming database.
maxNumberOfRecentsDisplayed=50
Limits the amount of "recents" entries that can be seen on the
Admin Recents Panel
50
Setting a reasonable limit prevents admins from overwhelming
database.
Default Value : 50 / Min Value: 1 / Max Value: 100

LMS_ADMIN: Admin Application UI Behavior Configuration: Security/ Modification


Default Chosen
Description
Value Value

293
LMS_ADMIN: Admin Application UI Behavior Configuration: Security/ Modification

restrictUserSelfModification=true
Admin Application UI Behavior Configuration: Security/Self
Modification *** When restrictUserSelfModification is set to
"true" administrators cannot change their own records. For
true example, when set to true, an administrator "jdoe" with
permissions to change administrator accounts can change all
other administrator password and permissions *except* for his
own. Default value is true. We recommend true. Possible
values are true or false. You might set to false in development
or training environments, for convenience.
displayModuleTabsInAlphabeticalOrder=true
This flag is used to order module tabs alphabetically. By
default, it is true and module tabs will be displayed in
true alphabetical order except for the Summary tab. Setting it to
false will result in module tabs being ordered as they
historically have been before this configuration was
introduced.
Old supervisor flow is deprecated.
true
Configuration options: true is the only valid option
autoCompleteLoginForUser=true
true
autoCompleteLoginForAdmin=true
true This configuration sets the login page behavior to-remember
or not-to-remember login credentials.
enableOnlineContentEarlyLaunchWarning=true
This configuration is used to enable the online content early
true launch warning. This configuration is added in b1207
true: will enable the early launch warning.
false: will disable the early launch warning.
onlineContentEarlyLaunchWarningThreshold=30
This configuration is used to enable the online content early
launch warning. This configuration is added in b1207
30 This configuration specifies the threshold for online content
launch warning and is only applicable when the
"enableOnlineContentEarlyLaunchWarning" is set to true. The
value is number of days and should be a positive integer
greater than or equal to 0.

294
LMS_ADMIN: Opted in Features Related Settings
Default Chosen
Description
Value Value

supervisorMaxUserRegisterWithdrawLimit=50

50 Maximum number of users a supervisor can enroll/withdraw.


Required to enforce Supervisor Registration Approval (Registration
Settimgs).
jamIntegrationEnabled=true
This configuration can be used to indicate whether the LMS
instance is integrated with Jam or not. (Note: this property replaces
true the previously used 'enableSocialTabInCatalogSearch' property.)
true: Indicates that Jam integration available and enabled
false: Indicates that Jam integration is not available or disabled
enableRandomPasswordGenerationForNewUsers=false
This configuration is used to determine whether to use default
password functionality or new initial random password generation.
false
true: will enable random password generation for all the users
created in our system.
false: will use default password functionality.
enableItemrecommendations=false
This configuration is used to enable both the item and program
false recommendations feature.
true: will enable item/program recommendations feature.
false: will disable item/program recommendations feature.
enableSmartLinks=false
This configuration is used to choose the type of links to be included
in the notification email. This is a system level configuration that is
to be chosen based on the level of authentication needed. This is
false added in b1505
true: will enable SmartLinks with personalized tokens for users to
provide access without a login.
false: will provide a directlink to the recommended external link that
requires a login to authenticate the user.

295
LMS_ADMIN: Opted in Features Related Settings

enableMultipleSecurityQuestionsForUser=false
This configuration is used to enable multiple security questions for a
false user.
true: enabled multiple security questions
false: will keep just a single security question.

false enableCourseHome=false

offlinePlayerLoginRequired=true
true
This configuration will enable or disable offline login page.
offlinePlayerUpgradeEnabled=true
This configuration controls whether Offline Player can be upgraded
true by users.
Warning: If Offline Player upgrade is false, users cannot sync their
contents with LMS.
showItemThumbnailPhotosGlobally=false
This configuration is to globally enable custom thumbnail images.
false true: will display all item photos EVERYWHERE in the application
(admin and end user interfaces).
False: will hide all item photos EVERYWHERE in the application
(admin and end user interfaces).
maxNumberOfTrainingRequestSeats=100
This configuration is used to determine maximum number of seats a
supervisor can reserve while adding/editing a training requesting.
100
Setting a reasonable limit prevents admins from overwhelming
database.
Min Value: 1 / Max Value: 10000
autoAssignReviewedTrainingRequests=false
This configuration enables automatic assignment of training
false requests if the organization has been reviewed and either the seats
requested equals seats granted or the preselected user count is
equal or less than the seats granted.

296
LMS_ADMIN: Opted in Features Related Settings

defaultAssignmentTypeForAutoAssignTrainingRequests=
This configuration is used during the auto assignments of training
requests, if the default assignment type is not provided for the
items.
showSystemDefaultThumbnail=false
This configuration decides whether to show default thumbnail image
false or default icon if a custom item thumbnail image is not uploaded.
true: global default photo will be displayed
false: global default icon will be displayed
enableHTMLDescriptions=false
This configuration is used to enable HTML for item and curriculum
false descriptions. The feature should only be enabled if the following
feature has also been enabled: HTML-based Configurable Tiles
(Recommended User Interface Display setting).
allowFutureHireDates=false
Setting the allowFutureHireDates property to true enables the
false creation/update of user records with a future hire date.
Setting it back to false prevents the creation/update of user records
with a future hire date but does not perform any data cleanup on
existing records.
enableCappingFactor=false
Setting the enableCappingFactor to true enables Capping Factor
false feature.This will make the learning event recorder to display system
default currency instead of the drop-down.It wont allow to change
the currency for addition costs in Learning Event Editor. This will
also hide Training days while recording learning.
enableNotificationHeaderFooter=false
false This configuration is used to enable/disable the notification header
and footer support.
exportExpiration=3
This configuration is used to set the maximum number of days that
3 an admin is able to download their export file results in the data
export tool. After the number of configured days, the admin will no
longer be able to access the export results. The allowable range is
between 1-30 days. Recommended default setting is 3.

297
LMS_ADMIN: Opted in Features Related Settings
allowAdminToModifyRegistrationFormCustomColumns=true

true allowSupervisorToEnterRegistrationFormCustomColumnsData=true

true allowUserToModifyCustomColumnsDataIfRegisteredBySuper=false

false allowUserToModifyCustomColumnsDataIfRegisteredByAdmin=false

false This flag is used to allow if admins can enter/modify data in the
registration form custom columns when registering/modifying users
enrollment
maxNumberOfSubordinatesDisplayedInTree=300
300 This configuration specifies the maximum number of subordinates
displayed under any node, including the top-level nodes when
displaying employees in the "My Team" tree-view.
MaximumLearningEventsDisplayed=0
0 The setting limits the number of records displayed to the user in the
user learning history. Set to "0" for unlimited record display.
UsersCanSubmitIncompleteOptionalSurveys=false
This configuration allows the admin to identify whether or not users
false can submit incomplete surveys for surveys that are set as ‘optional’.
This setting applies to both Item Evaluation and Follow-up
Evaluation survey types.
manageLearningToolEnabled=false
false
Enables the Manage Learning Tool from a scheduled offering.
enableCourseHome=false

false This configuration will enable the new course home page instead of
the item details.
This feature is in Preview and should not be turned on in Production
enableContentObjectAuditTrail=false
This configuration will enable the content object Audit
false When set to true , new field(enable_content_audit) is visible on item
snapshot for online and blended courses when
enable_content_audit is set to true, the content communication is
saved to Audit table i.e., PA_CBT_STUD_CPNT_MOD_AUDIT

298
LMS_ADMIN: Opted in Features Related Settings

sebPublishedEventTypes[LearningCompletion]=false

false This configuration allows publishing of events to the Service Event


Bus (SEB) to be enabled/disabled per SEB-supported event type.

selfRegistrationUniqueEmailAddressRequired=false

false When set to true, if a self-registering user provides an email


address, the system will not register the user unless that email
address is unique across all users of the system
updatedSelfRecordLearningFlow=true
End users can now use the updated Record Learning tool (same
false one the supervisors use).
Supervisors now launch the updated tool consistently from all
locations when enabled.
useOrgEmailAsFromForNotifications=false
false When set to true, the from field of the email notification will be
replaced with the recipient's org email.
enablePurgeLog=false
When this configuration is enabled, the Purge Deleted User Audit
false History APM will add a list of the purged users to
PA_USER_PURGE_LOG. Disabling this configuration does not
delete any previously added records.
hideViewedP2PRecommendation=true
Peer Recommendations will be removed from the recommendation
true tile after peer recommendations have been viewed by the user by
navigating to the Item / Program Details page and the
recommended Item or Program is added to the learning plan or
learning history.
enableKBASearchService=true
This KBA feature depends on the System Setting
enableErrorFingerprinting JVM flag.
true
If the enableErrorFingerprinting flag is false, this setting will be
considered as false always.
Set it to false to opt out.

299
13.3.14 MOBILE
This configuration contains settings for Mobile

MOBILE
Default Chosen
Value Value Description

enableWebLinks=true
This configuration is used to enable/disable opening links within
online learning content in the SuccessFactors app.
This includes links to open a pop up or a secondary screen
true within the app.
If set to false, users will not be able to open links within a
learning content object.
If set to true, users will be able to open links within a learning
content object.
enableMobileHtmlDescription=
**This configuration is not working in this release.**
This configuration is used to enable HTML in learning item
descriptions in the SuccessFactors mobile app.
The feature should only be enabled if the following feature has
true also been enabled: enableHTMLDescriptions. Enable at System
Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > LMS_Admin.
If set to false, users will be able to view the standard item
description.
If set to true, users will be able to view HTML for item
description.
enableProgramOverviewTab=true
This configuration is used to enable/disable programs overview
tab on mobile.
true If set to false, users will not see programs overview tab on
mobile.
If set to true, users will see programs overview tab on mobile if
setup for individual programs.
enableiOSEnhancedContentRenderer=false

false This configuration is used to enable/disable Enhanced Content


Renderer for iOS. When enabled, the enableWebLinks setting is
no longer relevant.

300
MOBILE

enableAndroidEnhancedContentRenderer=false
false This configuration is used to enable/disable Enhanced Content
Renderer for Android.

13.3.15 OPEN CONTENT NETWORK


This configuration contains settings for Open Content Network.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > OPEN CONTENT NETWORK
OPEN CONTENT NETWORK
Default Chosen
Value Value Description

defaultValues.domainID[default]=
null
Domain group
defaultValues.crossDomainEnabled[default]=false
false
This configuration enables the cross domain
defaultValues.enableMobileAccess[default]=true
true
This configuration enables the mobile access.
defaultValues.isOnline[default]=true
true
This configuration set the courses as online.
defaultValues.isApprovalRequired[default]=false
false
This configuration enables the approval.
defaultValues.isSupervisorCanRecordLearningEvents[default]=true
true This configuration controls whether supervisor can record learning
events.
defaultValues.isUserCanRecordLearningEvents[default]=true
true This configuration controls whether user can self record learning
events.
defaultValues.processDefinitionID[default]=
null
This configuration sets the default approval process definition ID.
defaultValues.currencyCode[default]=
null This configuration sets the currency code. If not specified, system
will take the default currency code.

301
OPEN CONTENT NETWORK

defaultValues.itemType[default]=
null
This configuration sets the item type.
defaultValues.itemCompletionStatus[default]=
null
This configuration sets the item completion status.
defaultValues.itemFailureStatus[default]=
null
This configuration sets the item failure status.
defaultValues.reviewable[default]=true
true
This configuration enables review of the item.
defaultValues.markCompleteOnLaunch[default]=false
false When Content Launch type is Browser, this setting is used to
record completion on launch.
defaultValues.chargebackMethod[default]=NO-CHARGE
Valid chargebackMethods are
"NO-CHARGE" -- No charges are applied.(DEFAULT)
"BUYER-AUTHORIZED-ACCT" -- Charge to Buyer's Authorized
NO- Account Code
CHARGE "BUYER-SPECIFIED-ACCT" -- Charge to Buyer's Specified
Account Code
"DISTRIBUTE-SPECIFIED-ACCT" -- Distribute Charges to
Specified Account Codes
If the Pricing Model is Either "SUBSCRIPTION" or "RETAIL" then
chargebackMethods should be "NO CHARGE".

13.3.16 PASSWORD_POLICY
Note: When password policies are enabled, ‘rule hint’ labels are displayed to users when resetting or
establishing initial passwords. The rule hint labels by default correspond to the default password policy
setting, therefore the corresponding rule hint label must be modified if the password policy deviates from
the default. E.g., if Password Length Rule is enabled and min/max is set to 6/30, the corresponding rule
hint label (instruction.passwordvalidation.PasswordLengthRuleHint) value should be modified to read
appropriately. Each active locale ID (Language Packs – if applicable) should be modified to display
properly to users:

302
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > PASSWORD_POLICY
PASSWORD_POLICY: Password Length Rule:
This setting determines the required length of the password.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE
ALL – Always applicable
CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created

Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when


password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL
Minimum
Password 1
Length
Maximum
Password 40
Length

PASSWORD_POLICY: Required Characters Rule:


This setting determines the characters required to be within a password.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE
ALL – Always applicable
CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created

Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when


password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL

303
PASSWORD_POLICY: Required Characters Rule:
This setting determines the characters required to be within a password.

EnglishUpperCaseLetters ("A" - Z")


Required EnglishLowerCaseLetters" (“a” –
Characters “z”) ArabicNumerals (“0”-“9”)
NonAlphaNumericCharacters (!@#$
%^&amp;*()-_+={}[]&lt;&gt;?/'&quot;;:\|)

PASSWORD_POLICY: Successive Character Repetition Rule:


The number of times a character can be repeated successively.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE
ALL – Always applicable
CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created
Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when
password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL
Max Repetition
Count 2

PASSWORD_POLICY: Un-Broken Login ID Rule:


Password cannot contain the User’s login id. Check can be case sensitive or case
insensitive.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE

304
PASSWORD_POLICY: Un-Broken Login ID Rule:
Password cannot contain the User’s login id. Check can be case sensitive or case
insensitive.

ALL – Always applicable


CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created

Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when


password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL
Case Sensitive TRUE, FALSE

PASSWORD_POLICY: First and Last Name Rule:


Password cannot contain User’s first name or last name or both together.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE
ALL – Always applicable
CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created
Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when
password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL

305
PASSWORD_POLICY: First and Last Name Rule:
Password cannot contain User’s first name or last name or both together.

The valid values for are:


1. FIRSTNAME_ONLY - implies the
password cannot contain Users first
name. It can contain Users
lastname.
2. LASTNAME_ONLY - implies the
password cannot contain Users
lastname. It can contain Users
firstname.
Check Type 3. FIRSTNAME_OR_LASTNAME -
implies the password cannot
contain Users firstname or
lastname
4.
FIRST_NAME_AND_LAST_NAME-
implies the password cannot
contain Users firstname and
lastname together. But it can
contain either the firstname or the
lastname but not both.
Case Sensitive TRUE, FALSE

PASSWORD_POLICY: Previous Passwords Rule:


Password cannot be same as specified number of previous passwords.
This check can be case sensitive or case insensitive.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE
ALL – Always applicable
CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created

Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when


password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.

306
PASSWORD_POLICY: Previous Passwords Rule:
Password cannot be same as specified number of previous passwords.
This check can be case sensitive or case insensitive.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL
Case Sensitive TRUE, FALSE
# of previous
passwords 1

PASSWORD_POLICY: Sub-String from Last Password Rule:


Password cannot contain substring of last password.
This check can be case sensitive or case insensitive.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE
ALL – Always applicable
CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created
Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when
password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL
Password cannot contain substring
Length from last password containing
same # of characters
Case Sensitive TRUE, FALSE

PASSWORD_POLICY: Minimum Time Between Password Change Rule:


Password cannot be changed before the minimum time between password change has
elapsed.
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE

307
PASSWORD_POLICY: Minimum Time Between Password Change Rule:
Password cannot be changed before the minimum time between password change has
elapsed.

ALL – Always applicable


CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created

Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when


password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL
Number of Days 90

PASSWORD_POLICY: Password Same As Esig Rule:


Password cannot be same as the Users electronic signature (PIN).
Description Value Options Chosen Value
Enabled TRUE, FALSE
ALL – Always applicable
CREATE - applicable only when an
User account is being created
Rule Type CHANGE - applicable only when
password is changed
CREATE_AND_CHANGE -
applicable when password is
created or changed.
User Type LEARNER, ADMINISTRATOR, ALL
Case Sensitive TRUE, FALSE

13.3.17 PERSONALIZED RECOMMENDATIONS (Beta)


Recommendations Engine enables the use of content and user data in algorithms that create
personalized learning recommendations. Personalized Recommendations is currently restricted
to early adopter care customers. If you're interested in enabling learning recommendations, visit
the page listed below to learn more and to sign up.
https://influence.sap.com/sap/ino/#campaign/1572

308
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > PERSONALIZED
RECOMMENDATIONS (BETA)
PERSONALIZED RECOMMENDATIONS (BETA)

Default Chosen Value Description


false This setting will configure the connection to the
recommendations engine.
recommendationsEngineEnabled=false
false Enabling catalog search data capture will store
information each time a user searches the
catalog. Data captured will be purged on
periodic basis.
catalogSearchDataCaptureEnabled=false
false This configuration when enabled displays a
disclaimer/note to the end user indicating
external content is also displayed apart from
the content from their catalog.
You can edit the disclaimer under References-
Geography-Labels.
enableDisclaimerForTheExternalContent=false

REPORT_SYSTEM: Asynchronous Report Generation


Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

Configuration of how to store asynchronous (background) report data in the DB


asyncStorageMaxSize=10485760
10MB This is the maximum size (in bytes, or KB/MB/GB) to store,
after which the report is aborted.
asyncStorageTTLDays=30
30 This is the number of days after which a report stored in the
DB will be removed (the job will remain, however).
Background jobs and emailing reports.
asyncEmailedReportFileName=report
Report Name to use in emailing the report file; output format
appended as extension. The filename of reports
SuccessFactors emails to administrators.

309
REPORT_SYSTEM: Asynchronous Report Generation

asyncLastUpdateUser=PLATEAU
PLATEAU This setting is the last update Administrator to use in
creating/updating database records from the report served.

REPORT_SYSTEM: Report Execution


Chose
Default Value n Description
Value

onlineTimeoutPeriod=300

300 Timeout period for running reports online in seconds. This


value has to be less than the HttpRequest timeout set on the
web server or app server.
backgroundTimeoutPeriod=1000

1000 Timeout period for running reports as background job in


seconds. This value has to be less than the transaction
timeout specified on the app server.
scheduleOnlyReports.UserCurriculumStatus=true
UserCurriculumSt
atus List of reports that can only be scheduled to run in the
background.
pdfMaxPageCount=200
200 Maximum page count for a pdf document. If the report exceeds
this length, the report generation will be aborted and the user
will be informed.
#Optional set of maximum page counts for specific reports that
will override the global setting above.
null #reportSpecificPdfMaxPageCount.PerformanceReviewStatusB
yStatus=250

REPORT_SYSTEM: Report Format


Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

310
REPORT_SYSTEM: Report Format

baseFontFile=/WEB-INF/fonts/arialuni.ttf
/WEB- This must be an actual font file; will look in the servlet
INF/fonts/arialuni.ttf context first, then as an actual file. Specify a unicode
font for full utf-8 compatibility.
baseFontEncoding=Identity-H
The encoding defines the association between a code
and a character. This is not typically changed. Some
common codes:

Identity-H Identity-H: horizontal


Identity-V: vertical
Cp1250: Central Europe
Cp1252: Western Europe
Cp1257: Baltic
Font Styles:
Size: 16
Title
Size: 12 Table Header
True Bold Table Header
Red: 102
Green: 102 Color
Blue: 153
Size: 10 Table Column Header
True Bold Column Header
Size: 8 Summary Column Header
True Bold Summary Column Header
Size: 10 Data
Size: 8 Page Header
Size: 8 Page Footer
Size: 8 Separator
Query Indent Width
3% This setting is the percent of the page width per level
of indent that the query table/data indents.

311
REPORT_SYSTEM: Report Format
Red: 240
Query Resumption Indicator Color
Green: 240 After the query prints detail, SuccessFactors prints a
Blue: 240 line of this specified color.

Red: 240
Tabular Row Alternating Background Color
Green: 240 Alternating rows in a tabular style query use this
Blue: 240 background color.

Red: 220
Summary Row Border Color
Green: 220 SuccessFactors boxes summary rows using this
Blue: 220 border color.

REPORT_SYSTEM: SFTP / FTP


Chosen
Default Value Description
Value

This section is used for


configuring an FTP server
remoteFtpEnabled=false to receive report output

defaultReportFtpConfig.protocol=sftp In environments where


access to root level
defaultReportFtpConfig.server=ftpupload.plateau.com directory is denied, path
defaultReportFtpConfig.port=22 can be configured as
relative path.
defaultReportFtpConfig.path=/
Relative path should be in
defaultReportFtpConfig.userID= the format - <directory in
user home directory>/<sub
defaultReportFtpConfig.password= directory>/<sub directory>
where <sub directory> are
optional.
#reportFtpConfig.ReportName.protocol=
#reportFtpConfig.ReportName.server=
#reportFtpConfig.ReportName.port=
for a specific report, add
#reportFtpConfig.ReportName.path=
#reportFtpConfig.ReportName.userID=
#reportFtpConfig.ReportName.password=

312
REPORT_SYSTEM: Adobe Download Link
Default Value Chosen Value Description

Href
Out-of-box This setting is the download URL of Adobe Acrobat
Reader.
Adobe Acrobat Image

Out-of-box Src

Out-of-box Label

Width: 88
Height:31 Size
Border: 0

13.3.19 SEARCH
This configuration contains the general administrator settings for the search framework.
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > SEARCH
SEARCH: General Search Settings
Default Value Chos Description
en
Value
2000 resultMaxRowAllowed=
This entry would now limit the maximum number of rows
returned by Flex searches.
10 resultRowsPerPage=
Default number of rows displayed per page.
5 Available options to the User for rows per page.
10 rowsPerPageOptions[5]=true
25 rowsPerPageOptions[10]=true
rowsPerPageOptions[25]=true
false studentShowAllOption=
label.All studentShowAllLabel=
5 Available options to the Admin for rows per page.

313
SEARCH: General Search Settings
Default Value Chos Description
en
Value
10 adminRowsPerPageOptions[5]=true
25 adminRowsPerPageOptions[10]=true
50 adminRowsPerPageOptions[25]=true
500 adminRowsPerPageOptions[50]=true
adminRowsPerPageOptions[500]=true
false adminShowAllOption=
label.All adminShowAllLabel=

The following two values (Entity Search and Picker Search) only apply if
GlobalSearchContext is enabled.
The name attribute can be set to EntitySearchDefaultToResultPage or
PickerSearchDefaultToResultpage. Entity Search appears when an administrator clicks a
menu (like User Management > References > Employee Types). Picker Search appears
when an administrator clicks the Picker icon . If you set either entity search or picker search
property to true, then, by default, all searches of that type open a results page instead of a
sub search page.
false [EntitySearchDefaultToResultPage]=
If Global Search Context is “true” and this setting is “true”, then
the search skips the search criteria page and show search
results directly.
false [PickerSearchDefaultToResultPage]=

false showSQL=
Setting this to true will print out SQL for debugging purposes.
1 catalogSearchResultsDisplayPriceType=
A list a valid display prices.
0 - Show All Prices
1 - Show Min Price
2 - Show Max Price

314
SEARCH: General Search Settings
Default Value Chos Description
en
Value
true catalogSearchResultsOrderBy=
CPNT_TYP_ID, catalogSearchResultsOrderByColumns=
CPNT_ID, The selected column must be one of the columns in the
validColumns list.
REV_DTE
Valid order by columns are
CPNT_TYP_ID,CPNT_ID,REV_DTE,SKU,DESCRIPTION,CPN
T_CLASSIFICATION

1000 maxInListItems=
Limit the number of in list items in SQL statement
500 maxResultsAllowedForAdminPowerSearch=
Max results per Admin search are set here, any numbers higher
than 10000 will be ignored and a max of 10000 will be used
-_'/\\ powerSearchWhitespaceCharacters=
Characters that are treated as blank spaces between tokens.
The predefined default values for whitespace are 'space' and
'tab'. The BASIC_LEXER uses whitespace characters (in
conjunction with punctuations and newline characters) to identify
character strings that serve as sentence delimiters for sentence
and paragraph searching.
true useGlobalCaseSensitivitySetting=
For all searches in the application, enable="true" disregards
each individual search selector setting, enable="false" uses the
settings in the selector file.
true globalCaseSensitive=
If Global Case Sensitivity is “true”, then this setting configures
the default Case Sensitivity value of all searches (“true” defaults
to Case Sensitive, “false” defaults to not Case Sensitive).
[OP_STARTWITH matchOptionDefaults
]=true
All the criteria in all the searches will default to the first matched
[OP_GREATER]= value in this list.
true

315
SEARCH: General Search Settings
Default Value Chos Description
en
Value
The options are:
OP_EXACTMATCH =
OP_EQUAL =
OP_STARTWITH =
OP_CONTAINS =
OP_ANYMATCH = "in"
OP_ANYMATCH_NOT = "not in"
OP_GREATER =
OP_LESS =
OP_GREATER_EQUAL =
OP_LESS_EQUAL =
OP_NULL =
OP_NOTNULL =

false restrictUserPeerSearchByOrg=
This configuration is used to limit the end user's user search to
users within an organization tree.
True: users may only search for users within specified
organization tree
False: users may search for any active user in the LMS
0 orgLevelsAboveUser=
This configuration is used to specify the number of organization
levels above the user's organization the user can search when
restrictUserPeerSearchbyOrg is enabled.
Min Value: 0 / Max Value: 30
0: search results returns only users associated to the user's
organization or its sub-organizations
> 0: search results returns users associated to user's parent

316
SEARCH: General Search Settings
Default Value Chos Description
en
Value
organization <x levels above user's org> and its sub-
organizations
false expandCatalogSearchBarFilters=
This configuration is used to specify whether to display language
and currency filters by default on the search bar.
True: Displays search bar with filters
False: Displays filters as collapsed. Legacy behavior.
true enableStemSearchInPowerSearch=
This configuration allows the power search to enable the stem
searching.
Expands a query to include all terms having the same stem or
root word as the specified term.
blank Additional Identifier in User Type Ahead Search=

The choice is between – Blank, Person External ID,


Organization Description and email address.

Admin can now configure an additional User identifier to be


displayed in braces for the User Type-Ahead search results in
case of the Peer Recommendation pop-up launched from
Collection, Catalog 3.0, Catalog Browse and User Search on the
Instructor's My Classes page.

317
13.3.20 TOPIC BANNER IMAGE ATTACHMENT
This configuration contains the topic (subject area) banner image settings.

TOPIC BANNER IMAGE ATTACHMENT


Chosen
Default Values Description
Values
true topicImageAttachmentTypes[jpeg]=true
true topicImageAttachmentTypes[jpg]=true
true topicImageAttachmentTypes[png]=true
2048 topicImageMaximumSizePerAttachmentKB=2048

13.3.21 USER GENERATED CONTENT


This configuration contains settings for User Generated Content (QuickGuides).
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > USER GENERATED CONTENT
USER GENERATED CONTENT
Chosen
Default Values Description
Values
supportedFileExtensions=*.jpeg;*.gif;*.png;*.jpg List of file extensions supported
by Quick Guide. Each item in the
list is separated by a ';'.
maximumPixelResolution=1024 Maximum Pixel Resolution on the
longest side of the Image to be
uploaded

13.3.22 USER LEARNING PLAN


This configuration allows an administrator to control the calendar ordering of the To Do list
which groups everything into several buckets. The ‘overdue’ bucket is required. The
“noduedate” bucket covers actions that don’t have an associated due date. The buckets
“overdue”, “later” and “noduedate” should not be changed except, if desired, to change the
wording of the associated labels.
Rules for adding/modifying the buckets;
Bucket ID must be unique
Matching label must be defined
The “overdue” bucket ID must have the “days” value set to 0
Non-overdue buckets with “days” defined can be added/modified/customized
The enabled flag controls whether this bucket is shown by the UI
System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration > USER LEARNING PLAN

318
USER LEARNING PLAN
Chosen
Bucket Default Values
Values
timeline.buckets.overdue.id=overdue
timeline.buckets.overdue.enabled=true
Overdue timeline.buckets.overdue.label=label.todo.view.Timeline.Overdue
timeline.buckets.overdue.days=0
timeline.buckets.overdue.expanded=true
timeline.buckets.next1weeks.id=next1weeks
timeline.buckets.next1weeks.enabled=true
Due in
the next timeline.buckets.next1weeks.label=label.todo.view.Timeline.Next7Days
week
timeline.buckets.next1weeks.days=7
timeline.buckets.next1weeks.expanded=true
timeline.buckets.next30days.id=next30days
timeline.buckets.next30days.enabled=true
Due in
the next timeline.buckets.next30days.label=label.todo.view.Timeline.Next30Days
month
timeline.buckets.next30days.days=30
timeline.buckets.next30days.expanded=true
timeline.buckets.later.id=later
Due
more timeline.buckets.later.enabled=true
than a
timeline.buckets.later.label=label.todo.view.Timeline.Later
month
from timeline.buckets.later.days=null
now
timeline.buckets.later.expanded=true
timeline.buckets.noduedate.id=noduedate
timeline.buckets.noduedate.enabled=true
No due
timeline.buckets.noduedate.label=label.todo.view.Timeline.NoDueDate
date
timeline.buckets.noduedate.days=null
timeline.buckets.noduedate.expanded=true

319
The admin can configure the to-do item fields displayed in the My Assignments Tile. The admin
can also configure the Learning Plan Display Threshold for Curriculum Requirements and Items.
The threshold is in days and the system will only display curriculum items and requirements on
the learning plan with Required Dates that are inside the threshold (items should have been
completed at least once so that their retraining interval settings kick in). If this is left blank,
items and requirements are always on the learning plan. There is a configuration to specify
whether to display the Learning Assignments filters by default in the tile.

USER TODO LIST


Default Values Chosen Values
todoFields[assignmentType].visible=true
todoFields[priority].visible=true
todoFields[assignedBy].visible=true
todoFields[partOfCurriculum].visible=true
todoFields[revisionDate].visible=true
todoFields[id].visible=true
learningPlanQualItemsAndRequirementsDisplayThreshold=90
expandLearningAssignmentsFilters=true

A) Extended Functionality

1911 French 1911 Commerce 1911 Admin Quick 1911 Competency 1911 Record 1911 SF-182 Request
Government Reporting.docx
Workbook.docx Links.docx Management.docx Configuration.docx External Learning.docx

1911 Reports 1911 Training SF_LRN_Learning_M


Reference.docx Planner.docx arketplace_en-US.pdf

320
B) Technical Deliverables
Use as needed. An overview of each technical deliverable for the implementation should be documented
in this section. Do not document the actual detailed requirements in this section. Reference the actual
separate document that includes the detailed requirements. Add/remove sections as necessary.

Extensions Required
Notes

Data Migration
Notes

SSO Interface
Notes

User Interface
Notes

Learning History Interface


Notes

Custom Report(s)
Notes

321
Copyright

© 2019 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.


No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose
without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company.
The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products
marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other
software vendors. National product specifications may vary.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational
purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated
companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only
warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth
in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, it any. Nothing
herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of
business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any
functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or
it’s affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platforms,
directions, and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its
affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in this document
is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality.
All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause
actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers are cautioned not to place undue
reliance on these forward-looking statements, and they should not be relied upon in making
purchasing decisions.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos
are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany
and other countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their
respective companies. Please see http://www.sap.com/trademark for additional trademark
information and notices.

322

You might also like